Mitsubishi Motors Galant 2011 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 424
1 of 424

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Motors Galant 2011 Owner's Manual PDF

Introduction N09200100846

Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI GALANT. We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engi- neered for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly reading this Owners Manual, you will gain an understanding of the many features that are included in the GALANT. The Owners Manual contains descriptions and illustrations that will assist in the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of your vehicle. Please note that this manual applies to all GALANT models and explains all features including options. Some features explained in this manual may not be installed on your vehicle.

Please leave this Owners Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will appreciate having access to the information contained here.

This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any obligation to install these on previously manufactured products.

Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION appear. These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow the instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

WARNING!

Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if instructions are not followed.

CAUTION!

Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor personal injury or damage to your vehicle. You will see another important symbol: NOTE Gives helpful information.

WARNING! Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle

components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproduc- tive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

2010 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in U.S.A.

This vehicle is manufactured by Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. in U.S.A. under license from Mitsubishi Motors Corporation.

11PS41(MMNA)_Cover2.fm 1

Table of contents

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Overview

Quick index

General information

Seat and restraint systems

Features and controls

Driving safety

Comfort controls

For emergencies

Vehicle care and maintenance

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Specifications

BK0121200US.book 1

Overview

Instruments and controls N00100201202

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.3-81 Turn signal lever P.3-84

Supplemental restraint system - air bag (for drivers seat) P.2-38 Horn switch P.3-91

Instrument panel light dimmer control knob P.3-87

Fog light switch (if so equipped) P.3-86

Steering wheel remote control switch (if so equipped) P.5-62

Instrument cluster P.3-72

Cruise control lever P.3-57

Ignition switch P.3-34

Wiper and washer switch P.3-87

Fuses P.7-35

Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch P.3-53

Engine hood release lever P.7-4

Steering wheel tilt lock lever P.3-29

BK0121200US.book 1

Overview

Selector lever P.3-39 Supplemental restraint system - air bag

(for front passengers seat) P.2-38

Parking brake lever P.3-28

Floor console box/ Tissue holder/Pen holders P.3-132

Power outlet P.3-122

Cup holder P.3-133

Glove compartment P.3-131

Trunk lid release lever P.3-16

Heated seat switch (if so equipped) P.2-10

Auxiliary Audio connector* P.5-60

BK0121200US.book 2

Overview

Center panel N00100700141

Audio system P.5-24, 5-37

Electric rear window defogger switch P.3-90

Air conditioning P.5-5, 5-13

Vents P.5-2

Front passenger seat belt warning light P.2-21

Hazard warning flasher switch P.3-85

Passengers air bag off indicator P.2-46

BK0121200US.book 3

Overview

Interior N00100301014

Power window switch P.3-23

Outside rearview mirror switch P.3-32

Dome light P.3-129, 7-46, 7-59

Sunroof switch (if so equipped) P.3-26

Reading lights P.3-128, 7-46, 7-59 Inside rearview mirror

P.3-30

Sun visors P.3-121 Vanity mirror P.3-122

Supplemental restraint system - side air bag (for front seats) P.2-54

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor (for front seats) P.2-22 Seat belts P.2-15

Head restraints P.2-12

Seats P.2-2

Arm rest P.2-11 Cup holder P.3-133

Supplemental restraint system - curtain air bag P.2-55

HomeLink Wireless Control System (if so equipped) P.3-124

Hands-free Bluetooth cellular phone interface system with voice recognition (if so equipped) P.3-92

BK0121200US.book 4

Overview

Trunk area N00100400252

Luggage hooks P.3-134

Tools P.6-8

Jack P.6-8

Spare tire P.6-10

Luggage hooks P.3-134

Inside emergency trunk lid release handle P.3-18

BK0121200US.book 5

Overview

Outside N00100601222

Outside rearview mirrors P.3-32

Fuel tank filler door P.1-4

Locking and unlocking P.3-12 Keyless entry system P.3-7Front fog lights

(if so equipped) P.3-86, 7-45, 7-51

Engine compartment P.7-6 Engine hood P.7-4

Windshield wiper and washer P.3-87

Headlights P.3-81, 7-45, 7-47

Front side-marker lights P.3-81, 7-45, 7-50

Front turn-signal and parking lights P.3-81, 7-45, 7-50

BK0121200US.book 6

Overview

License plate light P.3-81, 7-45, 7-57

Trunk lid P.3-16

Tail and stop lights P.3-81, 7-45, 7-53 Rear side-maker lights P.3-81, 7-45, 7-53

Rear turn-signal lights P.3-84, 7-45, 7-53

Tire inflation pressure P.7-23 Changing tires P.6-9 Tire rotation P.7-25 Tire chains P.7-27 Wheel covers (if so equipped) P.6-19 Tire pressure monitoring system P.3-63

Back-up lights P.7-45, 7-54

High-mounted stop light P.7-45, 7-56

Antenna P.5-71

Satellite radio antenna (if so equipped) P.5-71

Rear-view camera (if so equipped) P.3-69

BK0121200US.book 7

Quick index

1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving... N00200701006

NOTE These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition key is first turned to ON.

Warning light Do this Ref. page

Charging system warning light

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.

P.3-80

Oil pressure warning light

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil level. If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P.3-80

or

Brake warning light

If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully released.

If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, stop and check the brake fluid level.

If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard braking and high speeds, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.

P.3-78

BK0121200US.book 1

2

Quick index

N indicator in the instrument cluster flashes rapidly

(twice per second)

Park your vehicle in a safe place. Idle the engine until the N indicator goes off. If the indicator does not go off, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P.3-42

or

Engine malfunction indicator (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or

Check engine light)

Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, con- tact emergency roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local towing company for assistance.

P.3-79

or

Anti-lock braking system warning light

When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only the ordinary braking system is functioning.

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Test the system as described on page 3-50.

If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recom- mend that you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P.3-50

SRS warning light

It is not necessary to stop the vehicle immediately, but we recommend that you have the air bag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.

P.2-27, 2-47

Warning light Do this Ref. page

BK0121200US.book 2

Quick index

3

N indicator in the instrument cluster flashes slowly

(once per second)

Have the automatic transaxle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. P.3-42

and

ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator

Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine. Restart the engine and check to see if the indicator comes on again.

If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning and normal operation of the vehicle will not be affected.

P.3-54

Tire pressure monitoring system warning light

If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper inflation pressure as soon as possible. (See Tire inflation pressures on page 7-23.) Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes of driving.

If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains con- tinuously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to normal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

P.3-65

Warning light Do this Ref. page

BK0121200US.book 3

4

Quick index

If you hear this sound... N00200800648

Sound Do this Ref. page

Constant tone when the drivers door is opened.

Key reminder buzzer A tone will sound if the drivers door is opened while the ignition key is in the LOCK or ACC position. Remove the key to stop the tone. OR

P.3-14

Headlight reminder buzzer A tone will sound if the drivers door is opened when the ignition key is in the LOCK or ACC position or removed from the ignition switch while the lights are on. Turn the lights off. The tone will stop automatically when the lights are automatically turned off. (See page 3-82 for auto-cutout function.)

P.3-83

BK0121200US.book 4

Quick index

5

Metallic squeal when you press the brake pedal while driving.

Brake pad wear alarm The brake pads are worn down to the serviceable limit. Have the brake pads replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

P.3-48

Tone when the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

Seat belt reminder buzzer When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the tone will sound for about 6 seconds. If the drivers seat belt remains unfastened 1 minute later, the tone will sound intermittently (12 times) when the vehicle is driven. If the drivers seat belt subsequently remains unfastened while the vehicle is being driven, the tone will sound as a warning each time the vehicle stops and starts. When the drivers seat belt is fastened, the tone will stop.

P.2-20

Tone when the vehicle is moving at more than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Door-ajar warning buzzer Door or trunk lid is not properly shut. If you shut the door or trunk lid, the tone will stop.

P.3-80

Wind buffeting when driving with one or both rear door windows opened.

What to do if you hear wind buffeting when driving Open the front door windows as well as the rear door windows. P.3-25

When the headlights have flashed for three minutes, the horn will sound inter- mittently for three minutes.

Theft-alarm system (if so equipped) The theft-alarm system is operating. To stop the alarm, turn the key in the drivers door toward the front of the vehicle (the lock direction) or toward the rear of the vehicle (the unlock direction). Alternatively, use the keyless-entry transmitter to lock or unlock the doors or the trunk lid.

P.3-20

Sound Do this Ref. page

BK0121200US.book 5

6

Quick index

If this problem occurs... N00200900694

Problem Do this Ref. Page Cannot turn the key.

From LOCK to ACC Turn the key while jogging the steering wheel in either direction. From ACC to LOCK Check the position of the selector lever. The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the P (PARK) position.

P.3-34, 3-36

Cannot shift the selector lever from the P (PARK) position.

Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal. Check that the ignition key is in the ON position. P.3-39

The windows are fogged up.

1. Set the mode selection dial to the or position. 2. Turn on the blower.

P.5-12, 5-19

The engine does not start. The lights do not come on. The lights are dim. The horn does not honk. The horn sound is weak.

Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed. P.6-2, 7-15

BK0121200US.book 6

Quick index

7

Problem Do this Ref. page

The engine coolant tempera- ture gauge indicator is at the H (hot) position. Steam comes out of the engine compartment.

The engine is overheated. Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place. P.6-5

The vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, or snow.

Move the selector lever rhythmically between Sports Mode and R (REVERSE) posi- tions, while pressing lightly on the accelerator pedal. P.6-23

WARNING! When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking

motion may cause the vehicle to suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders. Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating

and transaxle failure. If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

BK0121200US.book 7

8

Quick index

Problem Do this Ref. page The brakes are not functioning properly after driving through water.

Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P.4-6

The automatic transaxle does not shift when accelerating and/or the vehicle does not easily begin to move.

There may be a problem in the automatic transaxle. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Shift the lever into 2nd gear of the sports mode when starting the vehicle. If the vehicle is on a level road, shift the lever back to D (DRIVE) position. (This method may or may not work depending on the type of malfunction.)

P.3-45

A tire is punctured.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level. 2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

P.6-9

BK0121200US.book 8

1

General information

Fuel selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 2 Filling the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 4 Modification of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 6 Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1- 8 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements. . .1- 9

BK0121200US.book 1

1-2

General information

1

Fuel selection N00301000794

Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gasoline only. It is equipped with a fuel filler tube especially designed to accept only a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispensing nozzle.

Gasoline detergent additives In the United States, fuel suppliers are required by law to add detergents to their gasoline to minimize fuel-injector fouling and minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and your emission-control system working properly.

Octane requirement Your vehicle is designed to operate on unleaded gasoline hav- ing a minimum octane number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2], or 91 RON.

Oxygenated gasoline Gasoline sold at some service stations contains oxygenates such as ethanol and MTBE, although the oxygenates may not be identified by those names. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in your vehicle.

Ethanol (Gasohol) A mixture of 10 % ethanol (grain alcohol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used in your vehicle, provided the octane number is at least as high as that recommended for unleaded gasoline.

Methanol Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline containing methanol (wood alcohol). Using this type of alcohol could adversely affect the vehicles performance and damage critical parts of the vehicles fuel system.

Reformulated gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning fuel referred to as Reformulated Gasoline. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and is specially blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline has no adverse effect on vehicle performance or on the durabil- ity of the engine and fuel system.

WARNING! Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You

could be burned, seriously injured or killed when handling it. Whenever you refuel your vehicle, stop the engine and keep flames, sparks, and smoking materials away from the vehicle. Always handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor areas.

CAUTION! Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will damage

the engine, catalytic converter, and the oxygen sen- sors. Also, using leaded gasoline is illegal, and will void your warranty coverage of the engine, catalytic converter, and oxygen sensors.

BK0121200US.book 2

General information

1-3

1

MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tri- carbonyl) MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasolines to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation recommends using gasolines without MMT. Use of gasolines blended with MMT may adversely affect per- formance, and cause the malfunction indicator on your instru- ment panel to come on. If this happens, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.

Sulfur in gasoline Your vehicle may have been designed to satisfy Californias low-emission regulations based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline. Gasoline sold in parts of the country other than Cali- fornia is allowed to have a higher sulfur content. Using such gasoline could adversely affect the vehicle's catalytic converter and cause the engine malfunction indicator (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE) to come on. Illumi- nation of this indicator while you are using high-sulfur gaso- line does not necessarily mean the vehicles emission-control system is malfunctioning. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer may suggest you try using a different, lower-sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to determine whether the problem is fuel-related.

NOTE Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems such as poor

starting, stalling during idling, abnormal engine noise, and poor acceleration. If you experience any of these prob- lems, try using a different brand of gasoline. If the engine malfunction indicator (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as soon as possible by the nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Repeatedly driving short distances at low speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel system and engine, resulting in poor starting and poor acceleration. If these problems occur, you are advised to add a detergent addi- tive to the gasoline when you refuel the vehicle. The addi- tive will remove the deposits, thereby returning the engine to a normal condition. Be sure to use a genuine Mitsubishi FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER. Using an unsuitable addi- tive could make the engine malfunction. For details, please contact the nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

BK0121200US.book 3

1-4

General information

1

Filling the fuel tank N00301100883

Fuel tank capacity 17.7 gal (67 L)

Refueling 1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear driver side of

your vehicle. To open the fuel tank filler door, press the left side of the fuel tank filler door.

WARNING! Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You

could be burned, seriously injured or killed when handling it. When refueling your vehicle, always turn the engine off and keep away from flames, sparks, and smoking materials. Always handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor areas.

Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to get rid of your bodys static electricity by touching a metal part of the car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on your body could create a spark that ignites fuel vapor.

Perform the whole refueling process (opening the fuel tank filler door, removing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not let any other person come near the fuel tank filler. If you allowed a person to help you and that person was carrying static electricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.

Do not move away from the fuel tank filler until refueling is finished. If you moved away and did something else (for example, sitting on a seat) part- way through the refueling process, you could pick up a fresh charge of static electricity.

Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel contains toxic substances.

Keep the doors and windows closed while refueling the vehicle. If they were open, fuel vapor could get into the cabin.

BK0121200US.book 4

General information

1-5

1

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly turning the cap counterclockwise.

4. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly on correct han- dling of the fuel filler nozzle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the nozzle in the tank port as far as it goes.

5. When the nozzle stops automatically, do not try to add more fuel.

6. To close, turn the fuel tank filler pipe cap slowly clock- wise until you hear clicking sounds, then gently push the fuel tank filler door closed.

A- Open B- Close

WARNING! Since the fuel system may be under pressure,

remove the fuel tank filler pipe cap slowly. This relieves any pressure or vacuum that might have built up in the fuel tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, injuring you or others.

CAUTION! Your vehicle can only be operated using unleaded

gasoline. Serious engine and catalytic converter damage will result if leaded gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and consequently, this must never be attempted.

CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not top-

off the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could discolor, stain, or crack the vehicles paintwork. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it off with a soft cloth.

WARNING! Make sure the fuel cap is securely closed. If the fuel

cap was loose, fuel could leak, resulting in a fire.

BK0121200US.book 5

1-6

General information

1 NOTE

If the fuel tank filler pipe cap is not tight while driving, the engine malfunction indicator (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or Check engine light) may come on when the onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs a self check. Always tighten the fuel tank filler pipe cap until you hear clicking sounds. The indicator will go off after driving several times. If the indicator does not go off, contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

Modification of your vehicle N00301600048

This vehicle should not be modified with non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. Modification with non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate regulations. In addition, dam- age or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

CAUTION! If you need to replace the fuel tank filler pipe cap,

use only the cap specified for your model vehicle.

BK0121200US.book 6

General information

1-7

1

Installation of accessories N00301700179

The installation of accessories, optional parts, etc., should only be carried out within the limits prescribed by law in the driving area and in accordance with the guidelines and warnings contained within the documents accompanying this vehicle. Only Mitsubishi Motors approved accessories should be fitted to your vehicle.

Improper installation of electrical parts could cause fire. Refer to the Modification/alteration to the electrical or fuel systems section within this owners manual.

Using a cellular phone or radio set inside the vehicle with- out an external antenna may cause electrical system inter- ference, which could lead to unsafe vehicle operation.

Tires and wheels which do not meet specifications must not be used. Refer to the Specifications section for information regarding wheel and tire sizes.

When fitting accessories, ensure that maximum gross vehicle weight and maximum axle weight are not exceeded.

Important point! Due to the large number of accessory and replacement parts provided by different manufacturers in the market, it is not always possible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to check whether the attachment or installation of non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts will affect the driving safety of your Mitsubishi vehicle.

CAUTION! Before any electrical or electronic accessories are

installed, consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

WARNING! If you choose to use a cellular phone while driving,

you must not allow that usage to distract you in the safe operation of your vehicle. Anything, including cellular phone usage, that distracts you from the safe operation of your vehicle increases your risk of an accident. Refer to and follow all state and local laws in your area regarding cellular phone usage while driving.

BK0121200US.book 7

1-8

General information

1

Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems

N00301800040

Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is important that any accessory that is to be fitted, or any modifications carried out which involve the electrical or fuel systems, should be carried out in accordance with Mitsubishi Motors guidelines.

Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts N00301400105

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are designed and manufac- tured to meet high standards of performance, and are recom- mended for all of your maintenance needs. Also available from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are a wide variety of accessories to personalize your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors authorized accessories to choose from to tailor your new vehicle to your own personal preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealers Parts Manager has information on various audio systems, protection items, as well as interior and exterior accessories available for your specific model.

CAUTION! Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer concerning any such accessory fitment or modification. If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or improper installation methods are used (protective fuses not included, etc.), electronic devices may be adversely affected, resulting in a fire or other acci- dent.

BK0121200US.book 8

General information

1-9

1

California Perchlorate Materials Require- ments

N00300100017

Certain components of this vehicle, such as airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may apply. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

BK0121200US.book 9

BK0121200US.book 10

2

Seat and restraint systems

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 2 Seats and restraint systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 3 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 4 Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 11 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 12 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 15 Seat belt use during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 25 Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems .2- 26 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 28 Maintenance and inspection of seat belts. . . . . . . .2- 38 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - air bag . .2- 38

BK0121200US.book 1

2-2

Seat and restraint systems

2

Seats N00408400437

1 - Front seats To adjust the seat forward or backward P.2-5 To adjust the seatback P.2-6 To adjust the seat height (Drivers side only) P.2-8 To adjust the lumbar support

(Drivers side, Power seat only) P.2-10 Heated seats (if so equipped) P.2-10

2 - Rear seat Arm rest P.2-11

BK0121200US.book 2

Seat and restraint systems

2-3

2

Seats and restraint systems N00401600052

Your vehicle has seat belts and other features that help protect you and your passengers in an accident. Seat belts are the most important safety device. When worn properly, seat belts can reduce the chance of serious injury or death in various types of crashes. For added protection during a severe frontal collision, your vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with air bags for the driver and passen- gers. The seats, head restraints, and door locks also are safety equipment, which must be used correctly.

Always check the following before you drive: That everyone in your vehicle is properly wearing their

seat belt. That infants and small children are properly secured in

appropriate child restraints in the rear seat. That all doors are fully closed and locked. That seatbacks are upright, with head restraints properly

adjusted.

Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or death in all motor vehicle accidents. You can help reduce the risk of injury or death, however, by following the instructions in this manual.

BK0121200US.book 3

2-4

Seat and restraint systems

2

Front seats N00401800360

Position the drivers seat as far back as possible while main- taining a position that still enables you to fully apply the ped- als, easily control the steering wheel and safely operate the vehicle.

Power seatManual seat

WARNING! Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving. This

can cause loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is securely locked into position.

To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death during deployment of the drivers air bag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the drivers seat as far back as possible while maintain- ing a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle.

To reduce the risk to the front passenger of serious injury or death during deployment of the passen- gers air bag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the front passengers seat as far back as pos- sible.

Always place children 12 years old and under in the rear seat and use appropriate child restraints.

BK0121200US.book 4

Seat and restraint systems

2-5

2

To adjust the seat forward or backward N00401900299

Manual seat Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the adjusting lever to lock the seat in place.

CAUTION! Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an adult. If it

is adjusted by a child, an unexpected accident might occur.

Do not place a cushion or the like between your back and the seatback while driving. The effectiveness of the head restraints will be reduced in the event of an accident.

When sliding the seats, be careful not to catch your hand or leg.

When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, pay careful attention to the rear seat passengers.

WARNING! To make sure that the seat is securely locked, try to

move it forward or backward without using the adjusting lever.

BK0121200US.book 5

2-6

Seat and restraint systems

2

Power seat Push the switch to adjust the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the switch, and the seat will lock at that position.

NOTE To prevent the battery from running down, operate the

power seat with the engine running.

To adjust the seatback N00402000330

Manual seat To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then lean backward to a comfortable position and release the lever. The seatback will lock in place.

1- Forward (towards the front of the vehicle) 2- Backward (towards the rear of the vehicle)

CAUTION! The reclining mechanism used in the seatback is

spring loaded, and will cause the seatback to return quickly to the vertical position when the lock lever is operated. When pulling the lever, sit close to the seatback or hold the seatback with your hand to control its return motion.

BK0121200US.book 6

Seat and restraint systems

2-7

2

Power seat Adjust the seatback angle by operating the switch as indicated by the arrows.

NOTE To prevent the battery from running down, operate the

power seat with the engine running.

1- To move forward 2- To recline backward

WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in the

event of an accident or sudden stop, all seatbacks should be kept in the upright position while the vehi- cle is in motion. Seat belt performance during an accident can be adversely affected if the seatbacks are reclined. The more a seatback is reclined, the more likely seat belt performance will be adversely affected. If the seat belt is not properly positioned against the body dur- ing an accident, there is increased risk you will slide under the belt and receive serious injury or death.

BK0121200US.book 7

2-8

Seat and restraint systems

2

To adjust the seat height (Drivers side only) N00402100227

Manual seat Turn the dial to raise or lower the whole seat cushion.

Power seat Front and/or rear parts of the seat cushion height can be adjusted.

NOTE To prevent the battery from running down, operate the

power seat with the engine running.

Front part of the seat cushion Operate the switch to raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion.

1- Raise 2- Lower

1- Raise 2- Lower

BK0121200US.book 8

Seat and restraint systems

2-9

2

Rear part of the seat cushion Operate the switch to raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion.

Whole seat cushion Operate the center of the switch to raise or lower the whole seat cushion.

1- Raise 2- Lower

1- Raise 2- Lower

BK0121200US.book 9

2-10

Seat and restraint systems

2

To adjust the lumbar support (Drivers side, Power seat only)

N00402200156

A lumbar support is included in the seatback of the drivers seat.

Heated seats (if so equipped) N00435600206

The heated seats can be operated when the ignition key is in the ON position.

The indicator light (A) will illuminate while the heater is on.

1- Strong 2- Weak

1- Heater high (for quick heating) 2- Heater off 3- Heater low (to keep the seat warm)

BK0121200US.book 10

Seat and restraint systems

2-11

2

Rear seat N00402500087

Arm rest N00403000210

Tilt the arm rest down for use as shown. The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to Cup holder on page 3-133.)

CAUTION! Switch off the seat heaters when not in use. Operate

the heaters at high for quick heating. After the seat has become warm, set the heater to low to keep it warm. Slight variations in the seat temperature may be felt while using the heated seats. This is caused by the operation of the heaters internal thermostat and does not indicate a malfunction. If the following types of persons use the heated seats, they might become too hot or receive minor burns (red skin, heat blisters, etc.): Children, elderly persons, ill persons Person with sensitive skin Excessively fatigued persons Persons under the influence of alcohol or sleep-

inducing medication (cold medicine, etc.) Do not place heavy objects on the seat or stick pins,

needles, or other pointed objects into it. Do not use a blanket, cushion, or other material with

high heat insulation properties on the seat while using the heater; doing so could cause the heater ele- ment to overheat.

When cleaning the seat, do not use benzene, gaso- line, alcohol, or other organic solvents; doing so could damage not only the surface of the seat, but also the heater.

If water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater off immediately if it appears to be malfunctioning during use.

BK0121200US.book 11

2-12

Seat and restraint systems

2

Trunk-through lid N00409000023

Open the lid to gain access to the luggage compartment from the cabin. This feature is useful for storing and removing small items. Fold down the armrest, then open the lid.

Head restraints N00404300555

Padded head restraints for the seats can reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your vehicle is hit from the rear. The head restraints are equipped in the illustrated position. The head restraints for driver and front passenger are adjust- able type, and the head restraints for rear outboard passengers are non-adjustable type integrated with the rear seatback. For the driver and front passenger, to maximize the effective- ness of your head restraint, adjust the seatbacks to the upright position and the head restraints to the proper position. Sit back against the seatback with your head close to the head restraint.

BK0121200US.book 12

Seat and restraint systems

2-13

2

Adjustment of the head restraint height To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, adjust the head restraint height so that the center of the restraint is at your eye level when seated. Any person too tall for the restraint to reach their eye level when seated should raise the restraint to the highest locked position.

To raise the restraint, pull it straight up. To lower the restraint, push down on it while pressing the

lock knob (A) in the direction shown by the arrow. After adjusting the height, push down on the restraint to

make sure it is locked in position.

WARNING! In order to minimize the risk of a neck injury due to

a rear impact, the seatback must be adjusted to the upright position and the head restraint must be adjusted to the proper position before vehicle opera- tion. The driver should never adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.

Driving without the head restraints in place can cause you and your passengers serious injury or death in an accident. To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, always make sure the head restraints are installed and properly positioned when the seat is occupied.

Never place a cushion or similar device on the seatback. This can adversely affect head restraint performance by increasing the distance between your head and the restraint.

BK0121200US.book 13

2-14

Seat and restraint systems

2

To remove Press the lock knob (A) in the direction shown by the arrow. Then pull the head restraint up and out of the seatback.

To install First check that the head restraint is facing in the right direction as shown in the previous illustration, and then insert it into the seatback. Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint locks into place.

WARNING! To help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event

of an accident, the head restraints must be properly installed and positioned to proper height before vehicle operation.

CAUTION! Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out as

shown in the illustration. Then pull the head restraint up to make sure that it is locked in place and will not come out of the seatback.

BK0121200US.book 14

Seat and restraint systems

2-15

2

Seat belts N00406000282

Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help reduce the risk of injury to the driver and passenger in the event of an accident. Always use the provided seat belts. Carefully review the following information for proper seat belt usage.

CAUTION! Always use the correct head restraint provided for

the seat and do not install the head restraint in the wrong direction.

WARNING! To help reduce the risk of injury or death in an acci-

dent, seat belts and child restraints must always be used. Refer to Child restraints on page 2-28 for additional information.

Never use one seat belt for more than one person. Never carry more people in your vehicle than there

are seat belts. Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit. Always place the shoulder belt over your shoulder

and across your chest. Never put it behind you or under your arm.

Always wear the lap belt as low as possible across your hips, not around your waist.

Never modify or alter the seat belts in your vehicle. To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or

death during deployment of the drivers air bag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the drivers seat as far back as possible while maintain- ing a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle.

BK0121200US.book 15

2-16

Seat and restraint systems

2

To reduce the risk to a front seat passenger of seri- ous injury or death from a deploying air bag, make sure the passenger always wears the seat belt prop- erly, remains seated all the way back and upright in their seat, and moves the seat as far back as possible. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - air bag on page 2-38 for additional information.

Never hold an infant or child in your arms or on your lap when riding in this vehicle even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never place any part of the seat belt you are wearing around an infant or child. Failure to follow these simple instructions cre- ates a risk of serious injury or death to your child in the event of an accident or sudden stop.

Children 12 years old and under should always ride in the rear seat and be properly restrained. This reduces their risk of serious injury or death in an accident, especially due to a deploying front passen- ger air bag. Refer to Child restraints on page 2-28 for additional information.

Any child who is too small to properly wear a seat belt must be properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system. Children 12 years old and under should be seated only in the rear seat to reduce their risk of serious injury or death in an accident, especially from the deployment of a front passenger air bag.

Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing child safety seat and positioned in the rear seat.

WARNING! In the event of an accident, all seat belt assemblies,

including retractors and attachment hardware, should be inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to determine whether replacement is necessary.

WARNING!

BK0121200US.book 16

Seat and restraint systems

2-17

2

Seat belt instructions N00406200330

All seats are equipped with a seat belt which uses one com- bined lap-and-shoulder belt with an emergency locking retrac- tor.

This system is designed to provide both comfort and safety. It permits full extension and automatic retraction of the belts dur- ing normal vehicle operation. A sensing device inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the retractor in the event of a sud- den change in the vehicles motion.

NOTE For instructions on installing a child restraint system using

a seatbelt, refer to Installing a child restraint system using the seat belt on page 2-34.

1. Occupants should always sit back in their seats with their backs against the upright seatback. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death during deployment of the air bag, adjust the drivers seat as far back as possible while main- taining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely oper- ate the vehicle. The front passenger seat should also be moved as far back as possible. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - air bag on page 2-38. Also refer to To adjust the seat forward or backward on page 2-5.

BK0121200US.book 17

2-18

Seat and restraint systems

2

2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the webbing so that it easily pulls across your body.WARNING!

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident or sudden stop, all seatbacks should be kept in the upright position while the vehi- cle is in motion.

Seat belt performance during an accident can be adversely affected if the seatbacks are reclined. The more a seatback is reclined, the more likely seat belt performance will be adversely affected. If the seat belt is not properly positioned against the body dur- ing an accident, there is increased risk you will slide under the belt and receive serious injury or death.

BK0121200US.book 18

Seat and restraint systems

2-19

2

3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding the latch plate. Push the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Pull up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is locked securely in the buckle.

NOTE If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled out, pull it

once with force and let it retract all the way. Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.

4. The lap part of the belt must always be worn low and snug across the hips. Pull up on the shoulder portion of the belt to take up any slack in the lap belt.

BK0121200US.book 19

2-20

Seat and restraint systems

2

NOTE With the exception of the seat belt for the driver, the seat

belts in all other seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint installation function (see page 2-34). When the ALR function has been activated, the seat belt will only retract. If this happens, let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.

5. To release the belt, press the button on the buckle and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists in the webbing. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

Drivers seat belt reminder/warning light N00418400153

A tone and warning light are used to remind the driver to fasten the seat belt.

When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the warn- ing light will come on and a tone will sound for about 6 sec- onds. If the drivers seat belt remains unfastened approximately 1 minute later, the warning light will flash and the tone will sound intermittently (12 times each) when the vehicle is driven. If the driver subsequently unfastens the seat belt while driving, the warning light and tone will issue further warnings. And if the seat belt remains unfastened, the warning light and tone will issue further warnings each time the vehicle starts moving from a stop. When the seat belt is fastened, the warnings will stop.

WARNING! Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and is worn

as low as possible across the hips, not around the waist. Failure to follow this instruction will increase the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident.

Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may adversely affect seat belt performance.

BK0121200US.book 20

Seat and restraint systems

2-21

2

Front passenger seat belt warning light N00418300035

The front passenger seat belt warning light is located above the central vents in the instrument panel.

The light normally comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes off a few seconds later. The light comes on when a person sits on the front passenger seat but does not fasten the seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is subsequently fastened.

WARNING! In order to reduce the risk of serious injury or death

in an accident, always wear your own seat belt. Do not allow anyone to ride in your vehicle unless he or she is also seated and wearing a seat belt. Children should additionally be restrained in a secure child restraint system.

WARNING! Do not install any accessory or sticker that makes

the light difficult to see.

BK0121200US.book 21

2-22

Seat and restraint systems

2

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor (front seats) N00406300083

To move the anchor down, press the lock knob (A) and slide the anchor down to the desired position. To move the anchor up, slide the anchor up to the desired posi- tion.

Anchor down Anchor up

WARNING! Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so that the

shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder without touching your neck. The shoulder belt should not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail- ure to follow this instruction can adversely affect seat belt performance and increase the risk of seri- ous injury or death in the event of an accident.

Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when the vehi- cle is not in motion.

Make sure the anchor is securely locked in position after adjusting it.

BK0121200US.book 22

Seat and restraint systems

2-23

2

Seat belt guide (rear seat) N00419300029

The seat belt guide for the rear seat outside positions will pro- vide added seat belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults. When the shoulder seat belt is inserted through the seat belt guide, the seat belt guide better positions the seat belt webbing away from the neck and head of an occupant.

Installation 1. Place the seat belt guide over the seat belt webbing and

insert the two edges (A) of the seat belt webbing into the slots (B) in the seat belt guide.

BK0121200US.book 23

2-24

Seat and restraint systems

2

2. Make sure the elastic cord (C) of the seat belt guide passes behind the seat belt webbing.

3. Fasten the seat belt and make sure it fits snugly across your shoulder. Refer to Seat belt instructions on page 2- 17.

CAUTION! Make sure the part of the seat belt webbing you

inserted into the seat belt guide is not twisted. Twisted webbing may adversely affect seat belt per- formance.

BK0121200US.book 24

Seat and restraint systems

2-25

2

Seat belt extender N00406700104

When your seat belt, even fully extended, is not long enough, a seat belt extender must be obtained. The extender may be used for either of the front seats.

Seat belt use during pregnancy N00406800088

Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, pregnant women are more likely to be seriously injured or killed in an accident if they do not wear seat belts.

WARNING! The extender should only be used if the existing belt

is not long enough. Anyone who can use the stan- dard seat belt should not use an extender. Unneces- sary use of an extender can adversely affect seat belt performance in an accident.

When not required, the extender must be removed and stowed.

WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to preg-

nant women and unborn children in an accident, pregnant women should always wear a seat belt. The lap portion of the seat belt should be worn snug and low across the hips and below the rounding. Consult your doctor if you have any additional questions or concerns.

BK0121200US.book 25

2-26

Seat and restraint systems

2

Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems

N00417700175

The drivers and front passengers seats each have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner system.

Pre-tensioner system The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner system. In moderate-to-severe frontal collisions, this system operates simultaneously with the deployment of the front air bags. The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within the seat belt retractors (A). When activated, the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt webbing and increase seat belt performance.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes the following com- ponents:

The air bag control unit monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. These include all of the items listed above and all related wiring. The pre-tensioner seat belts will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.

1- SRS warning light 2- Front impact sensors 3- Seat belt pre-tensioners 4- Seat belt buckle switches 5- Air bag control unit

BK0121200US.book 26

Seat and restraint systems

2-27

2

When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate, some smoke is released and a loud noise will be heard. The smoke is not harm- ful, but care should be taken not to intentionally inhale it, as it may cause some temporary irritation to people with respiratory problems. Even in the event of a severe frontal impact, the pre-tensioners will not operate if the seat belts are not fastened. The seat belt pre-tensioners may not activate in certain frontal collisions, even though the vehicle may appear to be severely damaged. Such non-activation does not mean something is wrong with the seat belt pre-tensioner system, but rather that the collision forces were not severe enough or not of the type to activate the system.

SRS warning light N00408700052

This warning light tells you if there is a problem involving the SRS air bags and the pre-tensioner seat belts. Refer to SRS warning light on page 2-47.

Force limiter system N00408900083

In the event of an accident, the seat belt force limiter system will help reduce the force applied to the driver and front seat passenger.

WARNING! The seat belt pre-tensioner system is designed to

work only once. After the seat belt pre-tensioners have been activated, they will not work again. They must promptly be replaced and the entire seat belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

BK0121200US.book 27

2-28

Seat and restraint systems

2

Child restraints N00407100668

When transporting infants or small children in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint system must always be used. This is required by law in the U.S. and Canada. Child restraints specifically designed for infants and small chil- dren are offered by several manufacturers. Choose only a child restraint system with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Cushions Safety Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufacturers statement of compliance on the box and child restraint itself.

The child restraint system should be appropriate for your childs weight and height, and should properly fit your vehi- cles seat. For detail information, refer to the instruction manual accom- panying the child restraint system.

Guidelines for child restraint system selection All children should be properly restrained in a restraint device that offers the maximum protection for their size and age. Be sure to check local, state, or provincial requirements for child size and age that may vary from the recommendations listed below.

Children less than 1 year old and children less than 20 pounds (9 kg) MUST ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.

Children older than 1 year of age and who weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must be in a forward-facing restraint used only in the rear seat.

Children who weigh more than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should use a suitable child seat or a booster seat (including a booster cushion) in the rear seat until the vehicles lap/shoulder belt fits them properly.

WARNING! All children must be seated in the rear seat, and

properly restrained. Accident statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat, rather than in the front seat.

Any child who is too large to use a child restraint should ride in the rear seat and wear the lap and shoulder belt properly. The shoulder belt must be positioned over the shoulder and across the chest, not across their neck, and with the lap belt posi- tioned low on the childs hips, not across their stom- ach. If necessary, a booster seat (including a booster cushion) should be used to help achieve a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster seat (including a booster cushion) manufacturers instructions. Only use a booster seat (including a booster cushion) that is certified as complying with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys- tems and Booster Cushions Safety Regulations.

BK0121200US.book 28

Seat and restraint systems

2-29

2

WARNING! Never hold an infant or child in your arms or on

your lap when riding in this vehicle, even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never place any part of the seat belt you are wearing around an infant or child. Failure to follow these simple instructions cre- ates a risk of serious injury or death to your child in the event of an accident or sudden stop.

WARNING! Your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger

air bag. Never put REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS or INFANT RESTRAINTS in the front passenger seat. This places the infant too close to the passenger air bag. During deployment of the air bag, the infant can be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing child restraints or infant restraints must only be used in the rear seat.

Air bag

BK0121200US.book 29

2-30

Seat and restraint systems

2

WARNING! FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS should

always be used in the rear seat whenever possible. If one must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat to the most rearward position and make sure the child stays in the child restraint, properly restrained. Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury or death to the child.

WARNING! It is important to use an approved rear-facing infant

restraint until the infant is one year old (unless the infant outgrows the seat sooner). This allows the infants neck and spine to develop enough to support the weight of their head in the event of an accident.

When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer and fol- low the directions in this manual. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death to your child in an accident or sudden stop.

After installation, push and pull the child restraint system back and forth, and side to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If the child restraint system is not installed securely, it may cause injury to the child or other occupants in the event of an accident or sud- den stop.

When not in use, keep your child restraint system secured with the seat belt, or remove it from the vehicle, in order to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during an accident.

BK0121200US.book 30

Seat and restraint systems

2-31

2

NOTE Before purchasing a child restraint system, try installing it

in the rear seat to make sure there is a good fit. Because of the location of the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it may be difficult to securely install some manufacturers child restraint systems. If the child restraint system can be pulled forward or to either side easily on the seat cushion after the seat belt has been tightened, choose another manufacturers child restraint system. Depending on the seating position in the vehicle and the child restraint system that you have, the child restraint can be attached using one of the following two methods: To the lower anchorage in the rear seat ONLY if the

child restraint is compatible with the LATCH system (See page 2-31).

To the seat belt (See page 2-34).

Installing a child restraint system using the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for chil- dren) system

N00418800072

Lower anchor locations The outboard seating positions in rear seat of your vehicle are equipped with lower anchors for attaching child restraint sys- tems compatible with the LATCH system.

NOTE The symbols on the seatback show the location of the

lower anchor points.

BK0121200US.book 31

2-32

Seat and restraint systems

2

Tether anchor locations N00418900161

Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the rear shelf, located behind the top of your rear seat. These are for securing a child restraint system tether strap to each of the 3 rear seating posi- tions in your vehicle.

Examples of child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system

N00419000156

A- Rear-facing child restraint B- Front-facing child restraint C- Child restraint system lower anchor connectors D- Tether strap

(These are only examples.)

BK0121200US.book 32

Seat and restraint systems

2-33

2

Using the LATCH system N00419100115

1. Open the gap a little between the seat cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with your hand to locate the lower anchors (C).

2. Push the anchor connectors on the child restraint system into the lower anchors (C) in accordance with the instruc- tions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Remember, the lower anchors provided with your vehicle are designed to secure suitable child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system in the outboard posi- tions of the rear seat only. The anchor connectors are NOT designed to secure a suitable child restraint system in the center position of the rear seat.

NOTE In order to secure a child restraint systems compatible

with the LATCH system, use the lower anchor points in the outboard positions of the rear seat. It is not necessary to use the vehicles seat belt. The vehicles seat belt, how- ever, MUST be used to secure a child restraint system in the center position of the rear seat.

WARNING! If there is any foreign material in or around the

lower anchors, remove it before installing the child restraint system. Also, make sure the seat belt is away from, not looped through or otherwise inter- fering with, the child restraint system. If foreign matter is not removed and/or the seat belt interferes with the child restraint system, the child restraint system will not be secured properly, could detach and move forward in the event of sudden braking or an accident and could result in injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust the seat where the child restraint system is installed.

BK0121200US.book 33

2-34

Seat and restraint systems

2

3. Open the cover for the tether anchor by pulling it back with your hand as illustrated below (3).

4. Latch the tether strap hook (D) of the child restraint sys- tem to the anchor (E) as illustrated below (4) and tighten the top tether strap so it is securely fastened.

5. Push and pull the child restraint system in all directions to be sure it is firmly secured.

Installing a child restraint system using the seat belt (with emergency/automatic locking mecha- nism)

N00407300325

With the exception of the driver, the seat belt in all other seat- ing positions can be converted from normal Emergency Lock- ing Retractor (ELR) mode to Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. This means that when you pull the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint installation function. Always use the ALR child restraint installation function when you install a child restraint system using the seat belt.

Children 12 years old and under should always be restrained in the rear seat, whenever possible, although the front passenger seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.

WARNING! Child restraint tether anchors are designed only to

withstand loads from correctly fitted child restraint systems. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

WARNING! When you install a child restraint system using the

seat belt, always make sure the retractor has been switched to the ALR child restraint installation function. The ALR function will keep the child restraint system tightly secured to the seat. Failure to convert the retractor to the ALR function may allow the child restraint system to move for- ward during sudden braking or an accident, result- ing in serious injury or death the child or other occupants.

BK0121200US.book 34

Seat and restraint systems

2-35

2

Installation: 1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating posi-

tion. 2. Route the seat belt through the child restraint system

according to the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer. Then insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure you hear a click when you insert the latch plate into the buckle.

3. To activate the ALR child restraint installation function, slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out of the retractor until it stops. Then let the belt feed back into the retractor.

4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is in the ALR function, you will not be able to pull it out. If the webbing can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR func- tion has not been activated and you will need to repeat steps 3 and 4.

BK0121200US.book 35

2-36

Seat and restraint systems

2

5. After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt allowing the slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child restraint system will not be secure. It may help to put your weight on the child restraint system and/or push on its seatback while pulling up on the belt (see illustration).

6. Open the cover from the tether anchor installation point by pulling it back with your hand as illustrated below (6).

7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint sys- tem to the tether anchor (B) as illustrated below (7) and tighten the top tether strap so it is securely fastened.

8. Before putting your child in the restraint, push and pull the restraint in all directions to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this before each use. If the child restraint system is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1 through 7.

If your child restraint system requires the use of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in accordance with the following proce- dures.

WARNING! Child restraint tether anchors are designed only to

withstand loads from correctly fitted child restraint systems. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

BK0121200US.book 36

Seat and restraint systems

2-37

2

9. To remove a child restraint system from the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode, remove the child from the restraint. Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt from the restraint and let the belt fully retract.

Children who have outgrown child restraint sys- tems

N00407600562

Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should be seated in the rear seat and wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses their stomach, a commercially available booster seat (including a booster cushion) must be used, to raise the child so that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder and the lap belt remains positioned low across their hips. The booster seat (including a booster cushion) should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Cush- ions Safety Regulations.

WARNING! Any child who is too small to properly wear a seat

belt must be properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system, to reduce their risk of serious injury or death in an accident.

A child should never be left unattended in, or unsu- pervised, around your vehicle. When you leave the vehicle always take the child out as well.

Children can die from heat stroke if left or trapped inside the vehicle, especially on hot days.

Keep your vehicle locked and the trunk lid closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle keys away from children.

Never allow children to play in the trunk of your vehicle.

WARNING!

BK0121200US.book 37

2-38

Seat and restraint systems

2

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts N00407000221

The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with mild soap or deter- gent solution. Do not use an organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow them to retract until completely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts. The color may rub off and the webbing strength may be affected.

Regularly check your seat belt buckles and their release mech- anisms for positive engagement and release of the latch plate. Check the retractors for automatic locking when in the Auto- matic Locking Retractor function.

The entire seat belt assembly should be replaced if the webbing shows any obvious cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec- tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or severe fading from sunlight. All of these conditions indicate a weakening of the belt, which may adversely affect seat belt performance in an accident.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - air bag

N00407700677

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which includes air bags for the driver and passengers.

The SRS front air bags are designed to supplement the primary protection of the driver and front passenger seat belt systems by providing those occupants with protection against head and chest injuries in certain moderate to severe frontal collisions. The SRS driver and front passenger air bags, together with sen- sors at the front of the vehicle and sensors attached to the front seats, form an advanced air bag system.

The SRS side air bags are also designed to supplement the seat belts and provide the driver and front passenger with protection against chest and abdomen injuries in certain moderate to severe side impact collisions.

The SRS curtain air bags are designed to supplement the seat belts and provide the driver and passengers with protection against head injuries in certain moderate-to-severe side impact collisions.

The SRS air bags are NOT a substitute for use of the seat belts. For maximum protection in all types of accidents, seat belts must ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or rides in this vehicle (with infants and small children in an appropriate child restraint in the rear seat, and older children buckled in the rear seat). Refer to Child restraints on page 2-28.

WARNING! Do not attempt to repair or replace any part of the

seat belt assemblies. This work should be done by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer per- form the work could reduce the effectiveness of the belts and could result in a serious injury or death in an accident.

BK0121200US.book 38

Seat and restraint systems

2-39

2

WARNING! IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS WEAR

YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY EVEN WITH AN AIR BAG. Seat belts help keep the driver and passengers

properly positioned. This reduces the risk of injury in all collisions, and reduces the risk of serious injuries or death when the air bags inflate. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained or improperly restrained driver or passengers can move forward into direct contact with, or within close proximity to, the air bag when it begins to inflate. The beginning stage of air bag inflation is the most forceful and can cause serious injuries or death if the occupant comes in contact with the air bag at this time.

Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in rollovers, rear impact collisions, and in lower-speed frontal collisions, because the air bags are not designed to inflate in those situations.

Seat belts reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle in a collision or rollover.

IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROPERLY SEATED. A driver or front passenger sitting too close to the

steering wheel or instrument panel during air bag deployment can be seriously injured or killed.

Air bags inflate very quickly and with great force. If the driver and front passenger are not properly seated and restrained, the air bag may not provide the proper protection, and can cause serious inju- ries or death when it inflates.

To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death due to a deploying drivers air bag, always properly wear your seat belt and adjust the drivers seat as far back as possible, maintaining a position that still allows the driver to have good control of the steering wheel, brake, accelerator, and other vehicle controls.

To reduce the risk to the front passenger of serious injury or death from a deploying passengers air bag, make sure the passenger always wears the seat belt properly, remains seated upright and all the way back in the seat, and positions the seat as far back as possible.

Seat all infants and children in the rear seat, prop- erly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system.

WARNING!

BK0121200US.book 39

2-40

Seat and restraint systems

2

WARNING! Air bags inflate very quickly and with great force.

Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or the instrument panel.

Do not put your feet or legs on or against the instru- ment panel.

WARNING! Infants and small children should never ride unre-

strained, or lean against the instrument panel. They should never ride held in your arms or on your lap. They can be seriously injured or killed in an acci- dent, especially when the air bags inflate. Infants and children should be properly seated in the rear seat in an appropriate child restraint system. Refer to Child restraints on page 2-28.

BK0121200US.book 40

Seat and restraint systems

2-41

2

WARNING! NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINTS or INFANT RESTRAINTS seat in the front passenger seat. This places the infant too close to the passenger air bag. During deployment of that air bag, the infant can be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing child restraints or infant restraints must only be used in the rear seat.

Air bag

WARNING! FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS should be

used in the rear seat whenever possible. If they must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat to the most rearward position and make sure the child stays in the child restraint, properly restrained. Fail- ure to follow these instructions could result in seri- ous injury or death to the child.

WARNING! Older children should be seated in the rear seat with

their seat belt properly worn, and with an appropri- ate booster seat (including a booster cushion) if needed. Refer to Children who have outgrown child restraint systems on page 2-37.

BK0121200US.book 41

2-42

Seat and restraint systems

2

How the Supplemental Restraint System works N00407800173

The SRS includes the following components:

The air bag control unit monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. These include all of the items listed above and all related wiring.

The air bags will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.

1- Drivers air bag 2- SRS warning light 3- Passengers air bag off indicator 4- Passengers front air bag 5- Front impact sensors 6- Drivers seat position sensor 7- Passengers seat weight sensors 8- Air bag control unit

9- Side air bag modules 10- Curtain air bag modules 11- Side impact sensors

BK0121200US.book 42

Seat and restraint systems

2-43

2

When the impact sensors detect a sufficient front or side impact to deploy the air bag(s), the appropriate air bag(s) will be deployed.

When air bags deploy, some smoke is released accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale the smoke as it may cause temporary irritation to people with respiratory problems.

After deployment, the air bags will quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bags inflated. Air bag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, and does not prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

Event Data Recording N00418600054

Your vehicle is equipped with an EDR - Event Data Recorder which is capable of collecting and storing data in the event of an air bag deployment.

The EDR may record the following information: Condition of specific vehicle systems; Whether the driver and front passenger seat belts were

buckled; Diagnostic code(s)

CAUTION! Air bags inflate very quickly and with great force. In

certain situations, contact with an inflating air bag may cause small cuts, abrasions, and bruises.

BK0121200US.book 43

2-44

Seat and restraint systems

2

Drivers seat position sensor N00417900092

The drivers seat position sensor is attached to the seat rail and provides the air bag control unit with information on the seats fore-aft position. The air bag control unit controls deployment of the drivers front air bag in accordance with the information it receives from this sensor. If there is a problem involving the drivers seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to SRS warning light on page 2-47.

Passengers seat weight sensors N00418000087

The passengers seat weight sensors are attached to the seat rails and provide the air bag control unit with information regarding the weight on the front passenger seat. The air bag control unit controls deployment of the passengers front air bag in accordance with the information it receives from this sensor. The passengers front air bag will not deploy in an impact when the weight on the seat is sensed to be less than approxi- mately 66 pounds (30 kg). In this case, the passengers air bag off indicator will come on. Refer to Passengers air bag off indicator on page 2-46. If there is a problem involving the passengers seat weight sen- sors, the SRS warning light in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to SRS warning light page 2-47.

WARNING! If the SRS warning light comes on, have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.

Please observe the following instructions to ensure that the drivers seat position sensor can operate correctly. Adjust the seat to the correct position, and sit well

back against the seatback. Refer to Front seat on page 2-4.

Do not recline the seatback more than necessary when driving.

Do not place metallic objects or luggage under the front seat.

If the vehicle is involved in a severe impact, have the sensor inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING! If any of the following conditions occur, you should

immediately have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as pos- sible: The SRS warning light does not initially come on

when the ignition key is turned to the ON or START position.

The SRS warning light does not go out after sev- eral seconds.

The SRS warning light comes on while you are driving.

BK0121200US.book 44

Seat and restraint systems

2-45

2

To ensure that the passengers seat weight sensors can correctly sense the weight being applied to the seat, observe the following instructions. Failure to follow these instructions can adversely affect the performance of the passengers air bag system. Adjust the seat to the correct position, and sit well

back against the seatback. Refer to Front seat on page 2-4.

Do not recline the seatback more than necessary. Never have more than one person (adult or child)

sitting on the seat. Do not place anything between the seat and the

floor console. Do not hang anything on the front passengers

seatback. Do not remove the head restraints. When attaching a child restraint system, secure it

firmly. Do not place luggage or other objects on the seat. Do not use a seat cover or a cushion. Do not modify or replace the seat and seat belt. Do not place luggage or other objects under the

seat. Do not place the floor mat on the seat rails. Do not expose the sensors to liquids or vapors. Do not subject the sensors to shock. Do not allow rear-seat occupants to push the front

passenger seat with their feet or force the front passenger seat upward.

Do not allow rear-seat occupants to grasp the front passengers seatback or put their arms around it.

When attaching a child restraint system in the rear seat, make sure it does not interfere with the front seat.

WARNING! If the vehicle is involved in a severe impact, have the

sensors inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING!

BK0121200US.book 45

2-46

Seat and restraint systems

2

Passengers air bag off indicator N00418100088

The passengers air bag off indicator is located above the cen- tral vents in the instrument panel.

The indicator normally comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out a few seconds later. In the following situations, the indicator will stay on to show that the passengers front air bag is not operational.

The passengers seat weight sensors sense a weight of less than approximately 66 pounds (30 kg) on the front passen- ger seat.

The front passengers seat is not occupied. When the weight applied to the front passenger seat is sensed to be approximately 66 pounds (30 kg) or greater, the indicator goes out to show that the passengers front air bag is opera- tional.

WARNING! If any of the following conditions occur, you should

immediately have the air bag system in your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible: The passengers air bag off indicator comes on

when an adult is sitting on the front passenger seat.

The passengers air bag off indicator does not come on when the front passengers seat is not occupied.

The passengers air bag off indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

The passengers air bag off indicator comes on and goes out repeatedly.

Do not attach any accessory to your vehicle that makes the passengers air bag off indicator difficult or impossible to see. You must be able to see the passengers air bag off indicator and verify the status of the passengers air bag system.

BK0121200US.book 46

Seat and restraint systems

2-47

2

SRS warning light N00408300104

There is a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning light on the instrument panel. The system checks itself each time the ignition is turned on. When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the SRS warning light should come on for several seconds and then go out. This means the system is working properly. If there is a problem involving one or more of the SRS compo- nents, the warning light will come on and stay on. The SRS warning light is shared by the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and the seat belt pre-tensioner system.

WARNING! If any of the following conditions occur, the SRS

and/or seat belt pre-tensioners are not working properly and you should immediately have it inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer: The SRS warning light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the ON or START position.

The SRS warning light does not go out after sev- eral seconds.

The SRS warning light comes on while driving.

BK0121200US.book 47

2-48

Seat and restraint systems

2

Drivers and passengers front air bag system N00407900204

The drivers air bag is located under the padded cover in the middle of the steering wheel. The front passengers air bag is contained in the instrument panel above the glove compart- ment. The drivers air bag and the front passengers air bag are designed to deploy at the same time. However, the front pas- sengers air bag does not deploy when the front passenger seat is not occupied or when the weight sensor in the front passen- ger seat senses a weight on the seat of less than approximately 66 pounds (30 kg).

Driver

Front passenger

BK0121200US.book 48

Seat and restraint systems

2-49

2

Deployment of front air bags N00408000143

The front air bags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when

The front air bags are designed to deploy when the vehicle suf- fers a moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical condition is shown in the illustration to the left.

The front air bags are designed to deploy only in certain mod- erate to severe frontal collisions within the shaded area between the arrows in the illustration to the right. The front air bags will deploy if the impact to the vehicles main structure is above a specific threshold level. The thresh- old level is approximately 15 mph (25 km/h) for a frontal colli- sion straight into a solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If the impact to the vehicles main structure is below this threshold level, the front air bags may not deploy. This thresh- old level may also be higher if the vehicle hits something that

absorbs the impact, either by bending or moving (for example, another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard rail). The beginning stage of air bag inflation is the most forceful, and can cause serious injuries or death if you are too close to the deploying air bag. Accordingly, it is important that you always wear the available seat belt.

Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded area between the arrows

Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher

BK0121200US.book 49

2-50

Seat and restraint systems

2

The front air bags MAY NOT DEPLOY when In certain types of frontal collisions, the front air bags may not deploy, even if the deformation of the body seems to be large, because the vehicles body structure is designed to absorb the impact and deform in order to help protect the occupants. Some typical situations where the front air bags may not deploy are shown in the illustrations.

Because the front air bags do not protect the occupant in all types of frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object

Collision where the vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck

Oblique frontal impact

BK0121200US.book 50

Seat and restraint systems

2-51

2

The front air bags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when The front air bags are not designed to deploy in situations where they cannot provide protection to the occupants. Some typical situations are shown in the illustrations.

Because the front air bags do not protect the occupants in all types of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts prop- erly.

Rear end collision to your vehicle

Side collision to your vehicle

Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

BK0121200US.book 51

2-52

Seat and restraint systems

2

The front air bags MAY DEPLOY when The front air bags may deploy if the underside of the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe impact (undercarriage impact). Some typical these situations are shown in the illustrations.

Because the front air bags may deploy in certain types of unex- pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations, and these unex- pected impacts can move you out of position, it is important to always wear your seat belts properly. When worn properly, seat belts can help maintain your distance from the air bags when they begin to inflate. The beginning stage of air bag inflation is the most forceful and can cause serious injury or death if you are close to the deploying air bag.

Collision with an elevated median/island or curb

Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole

Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the ground

BK0121200US.book 52

Seat and restraint systems

2-53

2

WARNING! Do not attach anything to the steering wheels pad-

ded cover, such as trim material, badges, etc. These could strike and injure an occupant if the air bag inflates.

Do not set anything on, or attach anything to, the instrument panel above the glove compartment. Such items could strike and injure an occupant if the air bag inflates.

WARNING! Do not attach accessories to, or put them in front of,

the windshield. They could restrict the air bag infla- tion, or strike and injure an occupant, when the air bag inflates.

Do not place objects, such as packages or pets, between the air bags and the driver or the front pas- senger. Such objects can adversely affect air bag performance, or cause serious injury or death when the air bag deploys.

Immediately after air bag inflation, some parts of the air bag system will be hot. Do not touch them. You could be burned.

The air bag system is designed to work only once. After the air bags deploy, they will not work again. They must promptly be replaced and the entire air bag system must be inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

BK0121200US.book 53

2-54

Seat and restraint systems

2

Side air bag system N00408100388

The side air bags (A) are contained in the driver and front pas- senger seatbacks. The side air bag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front seat.

A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehicles with side air bags.

BK0121200US.book 54

Seat and restraint systems

2-55

2

Curtain air bag system N00419200158

The curtain air bags are contained in the front and rear pillars and roof side rail. The curtain air bag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passen- ger in the front seat.

WARNING! The side air bags and curtain air bags can cause

serious injury or death to anyone too close to the air bag when it deploys. To reduce the risk of injury from deploying side air bags and curtain air bags, all occupants must be properly restrained and seated well back, upright, and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean against the door.

BK0121200US.book 55

2-56

Seat and restraint systems

2

WARNING! In order to reduce the risk of injury from a deploy-

ing side air bag, do not allow any rear seat passen- gers to hold onto the back of either front seat. Special care should be taken with children.

Do not place any objects near or around the front of either front seatback. Such objects can interfere with proper side air bag deployment and cause injury during deployment of the side air bag.

Do not place stickers, labels or additional trim on the back of either front seat. They can interfere with proper side air bag deployment.

Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats that have side air bags. Covers can interfere with proper side air bag deployment and adversely affect side air bag performance.

WARNING! Do not attach a microphone (A) or any other object

around the part where the curtain air bag (B) deploys, such as on the windshield, side door glass or front and rear pillars and roof side or assist grips. When the curtain air bag inflates, the object may be hurled with great force or the curtain air bag may not inflate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.

BK0121200US.book 56

Seat and restraint systems

2-57

2

WARNING! Do not put a hanger or any heavy or pointed object

on the coat hook. If the curtain air bag was acti- vated, any such item could be propelled away with great force and could prevent the curtain air bag from inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly on the coat hook (without using a hanger). Make sure there are no heavy or sharp objects in the pockets of clothes that you hang on the coat hook.

Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Rear-facing child restraints MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.

Front-facing child restraints should also be used ONLY in the rear seat. If a front-facing child restraint must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, and make sure that the child stays in the child restraint, properly restrained and away from the door.

Do not allow a child to lean against or sit close to the passenger door, even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. The childs head should also not lean against or be close to the section of the seatback where the side air bag and curtain air bag are located. It is dangerous if the side air bag and cur- tain air bag deploys. Failure to follow all of these instructions could lead to serious injury or death to the child.

Work done on or in the vicinity of the side air bag and curtain air bag system components should be done only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Improper work methods can cause acciden- tal side air bag and curtain air bag deployment, or render a side air bag and curtain air bag inoperable. Either of these situations can result in serious injury or death.

WARNING!

BK0121200US.book 57

2-58

Seat and restraint systems

2

Deployment of side air bag and curtain air bag N00408200031

The side air bag and curtain air bag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when A side air bag and curtain air bag are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe side impact to the mid- dle of the passenger compartment. The typical situation is shown in the illustration.

The seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of pro- tection in an accident. The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem) side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all occupants, be sure to always wear your seat belts prop- erly.

The side air bag and curtain air bag MAY NOT DEPLOY when In certain types of side collisions, the side air bag and curtain air bag may not deploy, even if the deformation of the body seems to be large, because the vehicles body structure is designed to absorb the impact and to deform in order to help protect the occupants. Also, depending on the location of the impact, the side air bags and curtain air bags may not deploy simultaneously. Some typical situations where the side air bag and curtain air bag may not deploy are shown in the illustra- tions.

Because the side air bags and curtain air bags do not protect the occupant in all types of side collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.

Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle bodys side structure

BK0121200US.book 58

Seat and restraint systems

2-59

2

Side impact in an area away from the passenger compartment

Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle collision with the side of vehicle

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object

Oblique side impact

Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

BK0121200US.book 59

2-60

Seat and restraint systems

2

The side air bag and curtain air bag ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when The side air bag and curtain air bag are not designed to deploy in situations where they cannot provide protection to the occu- pants. Some typical situations are shown in the illustrations.

Because the side air bags and curtain air bags do not protect the occupants in all types of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.

SRS servicing N00408500630

Head-on collision

Rear end collision

WARNING! Any maintenance performed on or near the compo-

nents of the SRS should be performed only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else to do any service, inspection, mainte- nance or repair on any SRS components or wiring. Similarly, no part of the SRS should ever be han- dled, removed or disposed by anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Improper work methods on the SRS components or wiring could result in an accidental air bag deploy- ment or could make the SRS inoperable. Either of these situations could result in serious injury or death.

Do not modify your steering wheel or any other SRS component or related vehicle part. For example, replacement of the steering wheel, or modifications to the front bumper or body structure can adversely affect SRS performance and may lead to injury.

If your vehicle has received any damage, you should have the SRS inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to make sure it is in proper working order.

Do not modify your front seats, center pillar or cen- ter console. Such modifications can adversely affect SRS performance and may lead to injury. Also, if you discover any tear or open seam in the seat fabric near the side air bag, have the seat inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

BK0121200US.book 60

Seat and restraint systems

2-61

2

NOTE When you transfer ownership of the vehicle to another

person, we urge you to alert the new owner that it is equipped with the SRS and refer that owner to the applica- ble sections in this owners manual.

If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, we urge you to first take it to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can be made safe for disposal.

If any of the following parts needs to be modified for use by a handicapped person, the advanced air bag system will be greatly affected. Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Drivers seat Front passenger seat Front seat belt Steering wheel Instrument panel

If you find a crack in or damage to the front pillar, rear pillar, or roof side rail where the curtain air bag is located, have the SRS inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

WARNING! [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] To contact Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to: Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. Customer Relations Department P. O. Box 6400 Cypress, CA 90630-0064

[For vehicles sold in Canada] To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or write to: Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 41009 4141 Dixie Road Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9

[For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico] To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean, Inc. call 1-800-981-0452 or write to: Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean, Inc. Customer Service Department P.O. Box 192216 SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216

BK0121200US.book 61

2-62

Seat and restraint systems

2

Warning labels N00408600224

Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS are located in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

*: Located in the passengers side as well.

BK0121200US.book 62

3

Features and controls

Break-in recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 2 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 2 Electronic immobilizer

(Anti-theft starting system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 3 Keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 7 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 12 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 14 Child safety locks for rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 15 Trunk lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 16 Inside emergency trunk lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 18 Theft-alarm system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . .3- 20 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 23 Sunroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 26 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 28 Steering wheel tilt lock lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 29 Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 30 Outside rearview mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 32 Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 34 Steering wheel lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 36 Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 37 Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 39 Service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 47 Anti-lock braking system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 49 Active stability control (ASC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 51 Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 56 Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 57 Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 63 Rear-view camera (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . .3- 69

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 72 Indicator and warning light package . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 77 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 78 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 78 Combination headlights and dimmer switch. . . . . 3- 81 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 84 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 85 Fog light switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 86 Instrument panel light dimmer control . . . . . . . . . 3- 87 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 87 Electric rear window defogger switch. . . . . . . . . . 3- 90 Horn switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 91 Hands-free Bluetooth cellular phone interface

system with voice recognition (if so equipped) . 3- 92 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122 Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122 Digital clock (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123 HomeLink Wireless Control System

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128 Accessory boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131 Floor console box/Tissue holder/Pen holders . . . . 3-132 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133 Luggage hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134 Coat hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134

BK0121200US.book 1

3-2

Features and controls

3

Break-in recommendations N00508700226

Advanced automobile manufacturing techniques permit you to operate your new vehicle without requiring a long break-in period of low-speed driving. However, you can add to the future performance and economy of your vehicle by observing the following precautions during the first 300 miles (500 km). Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during the break-in period.

Avoid revving the engine. Avoid rough driving such as fast starts, sudden accelera-

tion, prolonged high-speed driving and sudden braking. These would have a detrimental effect on the engine and also cause increased fuel and oil consumption, which could result in malfunction of the engine components. Be particularly careful to avoid full acceleration while in low gear.

Do not overload the vehicle. Observe the seating capacity (See Cargo load precautions on page 4-12).

Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.

Keys N00508800546

Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks. Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.

BK0121200US.book 2

Features and controls

3-3

3

NOTE The key number (A) is stamped on the key number plate

as shown in the illustration. Make a record of the key number and store the key and key number plate in separate places, so that you can order a key from your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer if the original keys are lost.

The key is a precision electronic device with a built-in sig- nal transmitter. Please observe the following in order to prevent a malfunction. Do not leave anywhere that is exposed to direct sunlight,

for example of the dashboard. Do not dissemble or modify. Do not excessively bend the key or subject it to strong

impact. Do not expose to water. Keep away from magnetic key rings. Keep away from audio systems, personal computers,

TVs, and any other equipment that generates a magnetic field.

Do not wash with ultrasonic cleaners or similar equip- ment.

Do not leave the key where it may be exposed to high temperature or high humidity.

As your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobi- lizer, the engine is designed so that it will not start if the ID code registered in the immobilizer computer and the keys ID code do not match. Refer to the section entitled Electronic immobilizer for details and key usage.

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

N00509100722

The electronic immobilizer is designed to significantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicle if an invalid start is attempted. A valid start attempt can only be achieved (subject to certain condi- tions), using a key registered to the immobilizer system. All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been pro- grammed to the vehicles electronics.

BK0121200US.book 3

3-4

Features and controls

3

NOTE In the following cases, the vehicle may not be able to rec-

ognize the registered ID code from the key. This means the engine will not start even when the key is turned to the START position. When the key contacts a key ring or other metallic or

magnetic object (Type A) When the key grip contacts metal of another key

(Type B) When the key contacts or is close to other immobilizing

keys (including keys of other vehicles) (Type C) In cases like the above, move the offending object(s) away

from the key and turn the key back to the ACC or LOCK position. Then try to start the engine again. If the engine does not start, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

BK0121200US.book 4

Features and controls

3-5

3

NOTE Electronic immobilizer is not compatible with commer-

cially available remote starting systems. Use of commer- cially available remote starting systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. Use only Mitsubishi Motors authorized accessories.

A system failure is suspected when the ignition key is turned to the START position, and the engine does not start. In such a case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Replacement keys Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electron- ics can be used to start the vehicle.

If you lose a key, you can order a key from your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by referring to the key number. To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the vehicle keys must be changed. Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have your ID code changed.

Additional keys To add a key, you need to register the ID code to the vehicle. Registering the ID code can be done by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it can be done by yourself (except for vehicles sold in Canada). For you to register the ID code yourself, follow the Customer key programming procedure below. If you choose to have your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID code, take your vehicle and any remain- ing keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE You are provided with 2 keys, but you may add up to 6

more keys.

Customer key programming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada) You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid (already registered) keys and blank (not registered) immobi- lizer key (specially cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors dealer) by doing the following:

1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the igni- tion to the ON position for 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the first key.

3. Within 30 seconds of turning the first key to the LOCK position, insert the second valid key into the ignition and turn it to the ON position. About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer indicator will start blinking.

CAUTION! Do not make any alterations or additions to the

immobilizer system. Alterations or additions could cause failure of the immobilizer.

BK0121200US.book 5

3-6

Features and controls

3

4. When the immobilizer indicator starts blinking, turn the second valid key to the LOCK position and remove it. Within 30 seconds after doing so, insert a blank immobi- lizer key into the ignition and turn it to the ON position. Perform this operation no more than 30 seconds after the immobilizer indicator starts blinking. When registration of the ID code is complete, the immobilizer indicator will come on for 3 seconds then go off. If an error occurs, the immobilizer indicator will go off during the procedure.

5. If you wish to register another key, perform the process again from step 1.

NOTE It is not possible to register a key if:

the immobilizer indicator goes off during the procedure the immobilizer indicator does not come on for 3 sec-

onds after step 4 The procedure will be terminated automatically if:

a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses from the moment when the first key is turned to the LOCK position to the moment when the second key is turned to the ON position

a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses from the moment when the second key is turned to the LOCK position to the moment when the blank immobilizer key (specially cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors dealer) is turned to the ON position

more than 30 seconds elapse after the immobilizer indi- cator starts blinking

BK0121200US.book 6

Features and controls

3-7

3

General information Your electronic immobilizer operates on a radio frequency sub- ject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

Keyless entry system N00509000848

Press the remote control transmitter buttons to lock or unlock the doors and to open the trunk lid. It can also help you signal for attention by setting off the panic alarm.

CAUTION! Changes or modifications not expressly approved by

the manufacturer for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

1- LOCK ( ) button 2- UNLOCK ( ) button 3- Trunk ( ) button 4- PANIC button 5- Indicator light

BK0121200US.book 7

3-8

Features and controls

3

To lock Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the doors. If they are locked while the dome light is not illuminated, the dome light will blink once. The turn signal lights will also blink once.

NOTE If you press the LOCK button (1) after locking the doors,

the horn will sound once to confirm that they are locked.

To unlock Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the drivers door only. Press the UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all the doors. If the drivers door only or all doors are unlocked while the dome light is not illuminated, the dome light will turn on for 15 seconds. The turn signal lights will also blink twice.

To open the trunk lid Press the trunk button (3) twice within 5 seconds and the trunk lid will be opened. The trunk lid must be closed manually after it has been opened.

NOTE On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi Multi-Communi-

cation System, the functions can be adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to a separate operation manual.

Answerback function The keyless entry system answerback functions from the horn and turn signal lights can each be turned on or off as desired. This is done with the key removed from the ignition switch.

NOTE The answerback function will not operate when the key is

in the ignition switch.

Horn deactivation/reactivation The answerback function can be set in the following three ways. Each time the answerback function is set, a tone will sound to tell you the condition of the answerback function.

1. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the UNLOCK button (2) during this time.

2. Release the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons within 10 sec- onds of pressing the UNLOCK button in step 1.

NOTE On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi Multi-Communi-

cation System, the functions can be adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to a separate operation manual.

One chime: The horn will sound if the doors are locked with the keyless entry system.

Two chimes: The horn will not sound, even if the doors are locked with the keyless entry system.

Three chimes: The horn will sound if the doors are already locked and the keyless entry system is used. In this mode, the horn will only sound when the keyless entry LOCK button is pressed again to reconfirm that the doors are locked.

BK0121200US.book 8

Features and controls

3-9

3

Turn signal light deactivation/reactivation The answerback function from the turn signal lights indicating when the doors are locked or unlocked can be turned on or off separately. A tone will sound once when the function has been turned on, and twice if it has been turned off.

To deactivate/reactivate the answerback function for lock- ing of the doors, take the following steps:

1. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the LOCK button (1) during this time.

2. Release the LOCK button and then release the UNLOCK button within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK button in step 1.

To deactivate/reactivate the answerback function for unlocking of the doors, take the following steps:

1. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the LOCK button (1) during this time.

2. Release the UNLOCK button and then release the LOCK button within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK button in step 1.

NOTE On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi Multi-Communi-

cation System, the functions can be adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to a separate operation manual.

Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may acti- vate the alarm to call attention as follows:

1. Press the PANIC button (4) for more than 1 second. 2. The headlights will blink on and off and the horn will

sound intermittently for about 3 minutes. 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on the remote con-

trol transmitter.

NOTE The indicator light (5) comes on each time a switch is

pressed. The keyless entry system does not work if the key is in the

ignition. The remote control transmitter can be used from about 40

feet (12 m) away. However, this distance may change if your vehicle is near a TV transmitting tower, a power sta- tion, or a radio station.

If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed and no door is opened within approximately 30 seconds: relocking will automatically occur. On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi Multi-Communi- cation System, the functions can be adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to a separate operation manual.

If the following conditions are observed after pressing one of the buttons of the remote control transmitter, the battery in the remote control transmitter may need to be replaced. The doors cannot be locked or unlocked. The trunk lid cannot be opened. The panic alarm cannot be operated. The indicator light (5) is dim or does not come on.

BK0121200US.book 9

3-10

Features and controls

3

If you lose your remote control transmitter, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a replacement.

If you wish to obtain an additional remote control trans- mitter, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum of 4 remote control transmitters can be programmed for your vehicle.

NOTE Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency

subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the Indus- try Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause interference. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired opera- tion.

Procedure for replacing the remote control trans- mitter battery

1. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, insert the cloth-cov- ered tip of a flat blade screwdriver into the notch in the remote control transmitter case and use it to open the case.

NOTE Be sure to perform the procedure with the Mitsubishi

mark facing you. If the Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you open the remote control transmitter case, the buttons may come out.

CAUTION! Changes or modifications not expressly approved by

the manufacturer for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

BK0121200US.book 10

Features and controls

3-11

3

2. Remove the remote control transmitter from the remote control transmitter case. Then, open the remote control transmitter using the method described in step 1.

3. Remove the old battery.

4. Install a new battery with the + side (A) down.

5. Close the remote control transmitter firmly. 6. Place the remote control transmitter in the remote control

transmitter case, then securely close the remote control transmitter case.

7. Check the keyless entry system to see that it works.

NOTE You may purchase a replacement battery at an electric

appliance store. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can replace the

battery for you if you prefer.

+ side

- side

Coin type battery CR1620

BK0121200US.book 11

3-12

Features and controls

3

Door locks N00509200390CAUTION!

When the remote control transmitter case is opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch the internal components.

WARNING! Make sure all doors are tightly closed and locked

while driving. Locked doors, in combination with the use of seat

belts, can help reduce the risk of ejection in an accident.

Locked doors can help keep passengers, especially small children, from opening doors and falling out of moving vehicles.

Locked doors can help prevent outsiders from gaining access to your vehicle when you slow or come to a stop.

Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. Children who get into unlocked vehicles may not be able to get out. Children trapped inside vehicles can quickly be overcome by heat and suffer serious injury or death due to heat stroke.

Never leave children unattended inside a vehicle. In addition to the risk of heat stroke, children can acti- vate switches and controls, resulting in an injury or fatal accident.

BK0121200US.book 12

Features and controls

3-13

3

To lock or unlock the door with the key (drivers door only) Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to lock the door. After checking that the door is locked, turn the key back to the center and remove it.

To lock or unlock the door from the inside Move the lock knob to the lock position to lock the door. All doors should be kept locked while driving.

The drivers door can be unlocked without using the lock knob by pulling on the inside door handle.

1- Insert or remove the key 2- Lock 3- Unlock

1- Lock 2- Unlock

BK0121200US.book 13

3-14

Features and controls

3

To lock the door without using the key 1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked position. 2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehicle. Close the door.

Key reminder buzzer N00549600136

If you open the drivers door while the ignition key is in the LOCK or ACC position, a tone will sound, reminding you to remove the key.

Lock out protection N00549700124

If the key is in the ignition switch when you push the lock knobs forward with the drivers door or passengers door open, the lock knob will automatically return to the unlocked posi- tion.

Power door locks N00509300447

NOTE Repeated continuous operation between lock and unlock

could activate the power door locking systems built-in protection circuit and prevent the system from operating. If this occurs, wait about 1 minute before operating the power door lock switch.

To lock and unlock by the power door lock switch

All of the doors can be locked or unlocked by pressing the power door lock switch on the drivers or the front passengers door.

1- Lock 2- Unlock

BK0121200US.book 14

Features and controls

3-15

3

Child safety locks for rear door N00509400275

Except for vehicles sold in Canada

For vehicles sold in Canada

Child safety locks help prevent rear passengers, especially chil- dren, from opening the rear door using the inside door handle. A lock lever for the child safety lock is provided on each rear door. When the lever is in the lock position (1), the rear door cannot be opened using the inside door handle. To open the rear door when the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, pull the outside door handle. When the lever is in the release position (2), the child safety lock is released and the rear door can be opened using the inside door handle.

1- To lock 2- To release

BK0121200US.book 15

3-16

Features and controls

3

Trunk lid N00509500120WARNING!

Always keep the doors tightly closed and locked when driving. An unlocked door may be acciden- tally opened by a passenger, especially by a child who could fall out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there is a greater risk of someone being thrown from the vehicle in an accident.

WARNING! It is dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open since

carbon monoxide (CO) gas can enter the cabin. CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can cause uncon- sciousness and even death.

Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. If trapped in the trunk, it is possible to escape from the trunk by using the inside emergency trunk release handle. (See Inside emergency trunk lid release on page 3-18.)

CAUTION! Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when loading

and unloading luggage. Heat from the exhaust could lead to burns.

BK0121200US.book 16

Features and controls

3-17

3

To open N00545200020

Operation from outside the vehicle Use the remote control transmitter to open. Press the trunk but- ton. (See Keyless entry system on page 3-7.) The trunk lid will pop up slightly. Lift it to open the trunk.

Operation from inside the vehicle

Pull the trunk lid release lever, located to the left of the drivers seat, up to open the trunk.

NOTE The trunk light comes on when the trunk lid is opened,

and goes out when it is closed.

To close N00545300034

If your vehicle is equipped with a trunk lid grip, pull the trunk lid grip (A) downward as illustrated and let it go before the trunk lid closes completely. Gently close the trunk lid from the outside so that it is com- pletely closed.

CAUTION! Do not use the trunk lid release lever while the vehi-

cle is moving. If the trunk lid is opened, objects in the trunk could fall onto the road and cause an acci- dent.

CAUTION! To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not attempt

to close the trunk lid without letting go of the trunk lid grip.

BK0121200US.book 17

3-18

Features and controls

3

Inside emergency trunk lid release N00509800123

The emergency trunk lid release is designed to provide a way to open the trunk lid from inside the trunk. It was developed to help prevent death and serious injuries, to children who might become locked inside a vehicle trunk.

The luminous T shaped yellow emergency trunk lid release handle (see illustration) is mounted near the latch inside the trunk.

The handle glows in the dark after exposure to sunlight.

Before starting the vehicle, be sure to confirm that the trunk lid is closed. If the trunk lid opens while driving the vehicle, objects stored in the trunk could fall out onto the road.

CAUTION!

BK0121200US.book 18

Features and controls

3-19

3

You and your family should familiarize yourselves with the location and operation of the emergency trunk lid release han- dle. Children should be taught not to play in or around vehi- cles.

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the handle in the direc- tion of the arrow on the handle. Push up on the trunk lid to open the trunk and climb out.

WARNING! Children should never be left unsupervised in or

around vehicles. Unsupervised children could lock themselves in an

open vehicle or trunk. People trapped inside a vehicle or trunk, even if only

for a short period of time, can quickly die from suf- focation or heat stroke, especially on hot days. Inte- rior temperatures in vehicles can rise in minutes.

Keep your vehicle doors locked and the trunk lid closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle keys away from children.

CAUTION! When loading the trunk, place your things so that

they will not touch the emergency trunk lid release handle when you close the trunk. Otherwise you could damage the handle and make it unusable.

Always keep the handle in its holder when driving so that your cargo cannot accidentally bump it and open the trunk.

Handle

Holder

BK0121200US.book 19

3-20

Features and controls

3

Theft-alarm system (if so equipped) N00510200042

The theft-alarm system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the vehicle. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the armed stage, the second is the alarm stage, and third is the disarmed stage. If triggered, the system provides both audible and visual alarm signals.

Armed stage N00510300072

Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the system as described below.

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 2. Make sure that the engine hood is locked. 3. Lock all doors by using the remote control transmitter.

NOTE The system is also armed by locking your vehicle using

the following procedures when you leave the vehicle. With either the drivers door or passengers door open,

set the inside lock knobs on both doors to the locked position and then close the door.

With either the drivers door or passengers door open, lock all doors using the power door lock switch and then close the door.

After completion of the steps above, the theft-alarm indicator (A) will illuminate for approximately 20 seconds and keeps blinking on and off, indicating that the system is armed.

Arm the system and leave.

BK0121200US.book 20

Features and controls

3-21

3

NOTE The system will be armed even if the engine hood is open,

but when the system is set, be sure that the engine hood is locked.

The system will be disarmed if, while the theft-alarm indi- cator (located in the front center of the dashboard) is illu- minated, all doors are unlocked by remote control transmitter.

The system will be disarmed if, while the theft-alarm indi- cator is illuminated, the ignition key is turned to the ON or ACC.

The system will not be armed if a door is not completely closed. If this happens, rearm the system as described above.

The trunk lid can only be opened by remote control trans- mitter without triggering or disarming the system even after the system has been armed. When it is closed, the system will be rearmed.

The driver should not arm the system until first confirm- ing that all passengers have left the vehicle. If the driver arms the system with passenger(s) in the vehicle, the alarm may be activated when the passenger(s) open the door.

Alarm stage N00510400116

The alarm will be activated if any of the following occur while the vehicle is parked and the system is armed.

1. One of the doors or the trunk is opened without the remote control transmitter.

2. The engine hood is opened from the outside.

Type of alarm When the alarm is activated:

1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 minutes. After 3 minutes the headlights automatically shut off.

2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3 minutes.

NOTE The alarm will continue to operate for 3 minutes. At the

end of that period, the alarm will automatically shut off to save battery power. The system will then be rearmed until the proper disarming step is taken.

Alarm deactivation The alarm can be deactivated in the following ways.

By using the remote control transmitter to lock or unlock the door or to open the trunk lid.

Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

Horn sounds! Headlights blink on and off!

BK0121200US.book 21

3-22

Features and controls

3

Disarmed stage N00510500074

The system will be disarmed when either of the following steps are taken:

1. All doors are unlocked by the remote control transmitter. 2. The ignition key is turned to the ACC or ON position. 3. If the UNLOCK button is pressed when all doors are

closed and no door is opened within approximately 30 seconds, re-arming will automatically occur.

NOTE Once the system has been disarmed, it cannot be rearmed

except by repeating the arming procedure.

Testing the theft-alarm system N00510600046

Use the following procedure to test the system: 1. Lower the drivers window. 2. Arm the system as explained in Armed stage. 3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator comes on and

flash in approximately 20 seconds. 4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the drivers side door

by using the inside door lock knob and opening the door. 5. Check to be sure that the horn sounds intermittently and

the headlights blink on and off when the door is opened. 6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors by the remote

control transmitter or using the key.

NOTE To make sure the alarm sounds when the engine hood is

opened, open the engine hood by using the engine hood release lever when the system is in the armed stage.

Disarmby remote control transmitter

BK0121200US.book 22

Features and controls

3-23

3

Power windows N00510800312

NOTE Never try to operate the main switch and sub switch in dif-

ferent directions at the same time. This will freeze the window in position.

Operating the power windows repeatedly with the engine stopped will run down the battery. Use the window switches only while the engine is running.

1- Open (down) 2- Close (up)

WARNING! Before operating the power windows, make sure

that nothing can be trapped (head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.

Never leave the vehicle without removing the key. Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.

BK0121200US.book 23

3-24

Features and controls

3

Main switch The main switch located on the drivers door can be used to operate all the door windows.

The windows will move while the switch is pressed and stop when the switch is released.

Sub switch

A sub switch can be used for its own passenger door window, unless the drivers window lock switch is activated.

NOTE The rear door windows open only half-way.

Timer function The power windows can be run up or down when the ignition key is in the ON position. The door windows can be opened or closed for 30 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ACC or LOCK posi- tion. However, once the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened, the power windows cannot be operated.

1- Drivers door window switch (To open the drivers door window all the way, you do not need to hold the switch down for the entire time.)

2- Front passenger door window switch 3- Left rear door window switch 4- Right rear door window switch 5- Window lock switch

1- Close 2- Open

BK0121200US.book 24

Features and controls

3-25

3

Lock switch N00549000039

When this switch is in the lock mode, the passenger door switches cannot be used to open or close the door windows, and the main switch will open or close only the drivers door window. To unlock the switch, press it again.

What to do if you hear wind buffeting when driv- ing

N00551400014

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a booming or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting when driving with one or both rear door windows down or partially opened. This is a normal occur- rence that can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear door windows open, open the front door windows as well as the rear door windows to minimize the condition.

1- Lock 2- Unlock

WARNING! Before driving with a child in the vehicle, be sure to

lock the window switch to make it inoperative. Chil- dren tampering with the switch could easily trap their hands or heads in the window.

BK0121200US.book 25

3-26

Features and controls

3

Sunroof (if so equipped) N00511000597

The sunroof can be opened and closed with the ignition key in the ON position.

To open Press the switch (1), the sunroof automatically opens and the sunroof will stop several centimeters this side of the full open position. Press the switch (1) again, and the sunroof will be fully open. To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch.

NOTE The sunroof stops just before reaching the fully open posi-

tion. If the vehicle is driven with the sunroof in this posi- tion, wind buffeting is lower than with the sunroof fully open.

To close The sunroof closes while the switch (3) is pressed.

To tilt up When the switch (2) is pressed, the rear edge of sunroof raises for ventilation.

To tilt down The sunroof tilt down while the switch (3) is pressed.

Timer function The sunroof can be operated when the ignition key is in the ON position. The sunroof can be opened or closed for 30 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off. However, once the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened, the sunroof cannot be operated until the ignition switch is turned on again.

BK0121200US.book 26

Features and controls

3-27

3

Sunshade The sunshade can be opened or closed manually while the sunroof is closed. When the sunroof is opened, the sunshade will also open auto- matically.

NOTE Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before closing the sun-

shade.

NOTE When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to close the

sunroof and remove the ignition key. Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is frozen closed

(after snowfall or during extreme cold). Do not sit on or place heavy luggage on the sunroof or

roof opening edge. Do not apply any force that may cause damage to the

sunroof. Release the switch when the sunroof has reached a com-

pletely open or completely closed position. If the sunroof does not operate when the sunroof switch is

operated, release the switch and check whether something is trapped by the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, have the sunroof checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if a ski carrier or a roof carrier is installed. Depending on the model of ski carrier or roof carrier, the sunroof may contact the carrier when the sunroof is tilted up.

Be sure to close the sunroof completely when washing the vehicle or when leaving the vehicle.

CAUTION! Do not attempt to close the sunshade when the

sunroof is opened. Be careful that hands are not trapped when closing

the sunshade.

WARNING! Do not stick your head, hands or anything else in the

sunroof opening. Before operating the sunroof, make sure that noth-

ing can be trapped (head, hands, fingers, etc.). Never leave a child (or other person who is incapa-

ble of safely operating the sunroof switch) alone in the vehicle.

BK0121200US.book 27

3-28

Features and controls

3

Do not put any wax on the weatherstrip (black rubber) around the sunroof opening. If it is waxed, the weatherstrip cannot maintain a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.

After washing the vehicle or after rain be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the engine turned off will run down the battery. Operate the sunroof only while the engine is running.

Parking brake N00511400139

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then set the selector lever to P (PARK) position.

To apply

1- Pull the lever up without pushing the button at the end of hand grip. When the parking brake is set and the ignition key is in the ON position, the brake warning light in the instrument cluster will come on.

Before driving, be sure to release the parking brake.

BK0121200US.book 28

Features and controls

3-29

3

To release

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade, away from the curb on an uphill grade.

Steering wheel tilt lock lever N00511500156

To adjust the steering wheel height, release the tilt lock lever while holding the steering wheel by hand, and raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired height. After adjustment, securely lock the lever by pulling it upward.

1- Pull the lever up slightly. 2- Press and hold the button at the end of the hand grip. 3- Push the lever downward.

CAUTION! Before driving, be sure that the parking brake is

fully released and brake warning light is off. If a vehicle is driven without releasing the parking brake, the brakes will be overheated, resulting in ineffective braking and possible brake failure.

1- Locked 2- Released

BK0121200US.book 29

3-30

Features and controls

3

Inside rearview mirror N00511600199

Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after making any seat adjustments so as to have a clear view to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING! After adjusting, make sure the lock lever is secured

in the locked (1) position. Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while

driving. This can be dangerous. When releasing the tilt lock lever {moving it to the

position (2)}, be sure to hold the steering wheel firmly. Otherwise, the steering wheel may slip down too suddenly.

WARNING! Do not attempt to adjust the inside rearview mirror

while driving. This can be dangerous. Be sure to adjust the mirror before driving.

Type 1

Type 2

BK0121200US.book 30

Features and controls

3-31

3

Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the view through the rear window.

To adjust the vertical mirror position It is possible to move the mirror up and down to adjust its posi- tion.

To reduce the glare Type 1 The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to reduce the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you during night driving.

1- Daytime position 2- Night position

BK0121200US.book 31

3-32

Features and controls

3

Type 2 When the headlights of the vehicles behind you are very bright, the reflection factor of the rearview mirror is automatically changed to reduce the glare.

Normally, use the automatic mode. When the switch (1) is pressed, the indicator (2) illuminates and the reflection factor of the mirror is automatically changed. When the switch (4) is pressed, the reflection factor of the mir- ror will not change.

NOTE Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner on the sensor

(3), as reduced sensitivity could result. For HomeLink Wireless Control System, please refer to

HomeLink Wireless Control System on page 3-124.

Outside rearview mirrors N00512200189

Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after making any seat adjustments so you have a clear view to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING! Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mir-

rors while driving. This can be dangerous. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driving.

Your passengers side mirror is convex. The objects you see in the mirror will look smaller and farther away than they appear in a regular flat mirror. Do not use this mirror to estimate the distance of vehicles following you when changing lanes.

BK0121200US.book 32

Features and controls

3-33

3

To adjust the mirror position The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted when the ignition key is in the ON or ACC position. Move the lever (A) to the same side as the mirror you wish to adjust.

Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror position.

NOTE After adjusting, return the lever to the (off) position.

Heated mirror (if so equipped) N00549300133

When the rear window defogger switch is pressed, the outside rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. Current will flow through the heater element inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or condensation. The indicator light (C) will illuminate while the defogger is on. The heater will be turned off automatically in about 17 min- utes.

L- Left outside mirror adjustment R- Right outside mirror adjustment

1- Up 2- Down 3- Right 4- Left

BK0121200US.book 33

3-34

Features and controls

3

Ignition switch N00512400657

LOCK The engine is off and the steering wheel is locked. The key can be inserted and removed only when the switch is in this posi- tion.

ACC Allows operation of electrical accessories with the engine off.

ON The engine runs and all accessories can be used.

START Engages the starter. After the engine starts, release the key and it will return automatically to the ON position.

NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with ignition switch illumina-

tion, the ignition switch will be illuminated: The ignition switch illumination comes on while the

drivers door is opened and remains on for about 30 sec- onds after the drivers door is closed.

When you remove the ignition key from the ignition switch, it will be illuminated for about 30 seconds.

However, it will go off even while the illumination comes on if the ignition switch is turned to ON posi- tion.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code which the transponder inside the key sends must match the one registered to the immobilizer computer. (Refer to the section Electronic immobilizer on page 3- 3).

If your vehicle is equipped with Daytime Running Lights, when the ignition key is in the ON position, the low beam of the headlight will illuminate dimly. (Refer to Combination headlights and dimmer switch on page 3- 81.)

BK0121200US.book 34

Features and controls

3-35

3

To remove the key

First set the selector lever to the P (PARK) position, and then turn the key to the LOCK position and remove it.

NOTE The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set

in the P (PARK) position.

Key reminder buzzer N00551000078

If you open the drivers door while the ignition key is in the LOCK or ACC position, a tone will sound, reminding you to remove the key.

CAUTION! If the engine is turned off while driving, the power

brake booster will stop functioning and braking effi- ciency will be reduced. Also, the power steering sys- tem will not function and it will require greater effort to manually steer the vehicle.

Do not leave the key in the ON position for a long time when the engine is not running. This will cause the battery to run down.

Do not turn the key to the START position when the engine is running. It will damage the starter motor.

CAUTION!

BK0121200US.book 35

3-36

Features and controls

3

Steering wheel lock N00512500137

To lock Remove the key at the LOCK position. Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.

To unlock Turn the key to the ACC position while moving the steering wheel slightly.

NOTE If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may

sometimes make it difficult to turn the key from LOCK to ACC. Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or to the right as you turn the key.

CAUTION! Remove the key when leaving the vehicle. If your vehicle needs to be towed, turn the key to the

ACC position to unlock the steering wheel.

BK0121200US.book 36

Features and controls

3-37

3

Starting N00512600691

Tips for starting Do not operate the starter motor continuously for longer

than 15 seconds as this could run the battery down or damage the starter motor. If the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch back to the LOCK position, wait a few seconds, and then try again. Trying repeatedly with the engine or starter motor still turning will damage the starter mechanism.

If the engine will not start because the battery is weak or discharged, refer to Jump-starting the engine (on page 6-2) for instructions.

The engine is warmed up enough for driving when the coolant temperature gauge indicator starts to move. A longer warm up period will only consume extra fuel.

Starting the engine Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled fuel injection system, which automatically controls the release of fuel. There is no need to depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. The starter should not be run for more than 15 seconds at a time. To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds between attempts to restart the engine.

1. Make sure all occupants are properly seated with seat belts fastened.

2. Insert the ignition key. 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down with your right foot. 4. Make sure the selector lever is in the P (PARK) posi-

tion. 5. Turn the ignition key to the ON position and make cer-

tain that all warning lights are functioning properly before starting the engine.

6. Turn the ignition key to the START position without pressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key when the engine starts.

WARNING! Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated

area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle out of the area. Carbon monoxide gas, which is odorless and extremely poisonous, could build up and cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION! Do not push-start the vehicle. Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive at high

speeds until the engine has had a chance to warm up.

Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor will be damaged.

CAUTION!

BK0121200US.book 37

3-38

Features and controls

3

Startability of automatic transaxle vehicle with ambient temperature of -31 F (-35 C) or lower When the ambient temperature is -31 F (-35 C) or lower, it may not be possible to start from a standstill even with the selector lever in the D (DRIVE) position. This phenomenon occurs because the transaxle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a problem. If it occurs, place the selector lever in the P (PARK) position and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. The transaxle will warm up, and you will be able to start nor- mally. Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up operation.

Using the MIVEC engine The MIVEC engine automatically switches its intake-valve control between a low-speed mode and a high-speed mode in accordance with driving conditions for maximum engine per- formance.

NOTE To protect the engine, the high-speed mode may not be

selected while the engine coolant temperature is low. In such a case, the engine revolutions do not rise to over 5,000 rpm even if the accelerator pedal is depressed.

BK0121200US.book 38

Features and controls

3-39

3

Automatic transaxle N00513200098

Designed for the most efficient control and equipped with self- adapting capabilities, the electronically controlled transaxle used in your vehicle selects the most favorable gear for each type of driving and road condition.

DRIVING UPHILL The transaxle may not shift to a higher gear if the computer determines your current speed would be affected. For smoother operation, the transaxle may not shift if you release the throttle while climbing a steep hill. This is normal because the computer controls the shifting. After reaching the top of the hill, your normal gear shift function will resume.

DRIVING DOWNHILL When traveling down steep grades and using the brakes, the computer may automatically select a lower gear. This helps engine braking efforts, reducing your need to use the brakes.

NOTE During the break-in period or immediately after recon-

necting the battery, your vehicle may not shift smoothly. This does not indicate a problem in the transaxle. Shifting will become smoother once the transaxle has been shifted several times by the electronic control system.

Selector lever operation N00513800355

As an additional safety precaution, models equipped with an automatic transaxle have a shift-lock device that holds the selector lever in the P (PARK) position. To move the selector lever from the P (PARK) position to another position, follow the steps below.

1. Press and hold the brake pedal down. 2. Move the selector lever to the desired position.

NOTE The selector lever cannot be moved from P (PARK) to

another position if the ignition key is at the LOCK posi- tion, or has been removed, or if the brake pedal is not pressed and held down.CAUTION!

The electronically controlled transaxle system is strictly intended to provide supplementary func- tions. When driving downhill under certain condi- tions, when the automatic transaxle is cold immediately after starting, no automatic downshift may be made. The driver should move the selector lever to shift down to a lower gear (3rd gear or 2nd gear), which will permit the engine to begin braking.

BK0121200US.book 39

3-40

Features and controls

3

The transaxle has 4 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. The individual gears are selected automatically, depending on the position of the gear selector lever, the speed of the vehicle and the position of the accelerator pedal. The selector lever has 2 gates: the main gate (A) and the manual gate (B).

NOTE For information on manual gate operation, refer to Sports

mode on page 3-44.

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4 positions, and is equipped with a lock button (A) to prevent inadvertent selec- tion of the wrong gear.

BK0121200US.book 40

Features and controls

3-41

3

NOTE If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, the shift-lock

device activates to prevent the selector lever from being moved from the P (PARK) position.

The lock button must be pushed while the brake pedal is depressed to move the selector lever. The selector lever will move without pushing the lock button. The lock button must be pushed to move the selector lever.

WARNING! If the lock button is always pressed when using the

selector lever, the lever may be accidentally shifted into the P (PARK) or R (REVERSE) position. Do not press the lock button when making shifts shown by in the illustration.

Always depress the brake pedal when shifting the selector lever into a gear from the N (NEUTRAL) position. When beginning to drive, do not shift the selector lever from the N (NEUTRAL) position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This will cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.

WARNING!

BK0121200US.book 41

3-42

Features and controls

3

Selector lever position indicator/ N indicator N00513900314

A- Selector lever position indicator When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the indicator in the instrument cluster comes on to show the position of the selector lever (i.e. PARK, DRIVE, REVERSE, etc.).

B- N indicator When the N indicator blinks while you are driving, there could be a malfunction in the automatic transaxle. (If the selector lever position is in the P (PARK), R (REVERSE) or N (NEUTRAL) position, the indicator does not blink.)

CAUTION! If a malfunction occurs in the automatic transaxle

while driving, the N indicator will blink. In this case, immediately park your vehicle in a safe place and follow these procedure: (The N indicator warning function does not oper- ate with the selector lever in the P (PARK), R (REVERSE) or N (NEUTRAL) position.) [The N indicator blinks rapidly (twice per sec- ond)] The automatic transaxle fluid is overheating. Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not turn off the engine. Move the selector lever to the P (PARK) position and open the engine hood. Keep the engine idling. After a while, move the selector lever to the D (DRIVE) position and confirm that the N indica- tor stops blinking. It is safe to continue driving if the N indicator no longer blinks. If the N indicator continues blinking or blinks intermittently, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. [The N indicator blinks slowly (once per second)] The automatic transaxle safety device may be oper- ating due to a malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

BK0121200US.book 42

Features and controls

3-43

3

Selector lever positions N00514200268

P PARK This position locks the transaxle to prevent the vehicle from moving. The engine can be started from the PARK position.

R REVERSE Move the lever to this position only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

N NEUTRAL At this position, the transaxle is disengaged. It is the same as the neutral position on a manual transaxle and should be used when the vehicle is not moving for an extended length of time during driving, such as in a traffic jam.

D DRIVE This position is used for most city and highway driving. Engine shifting and braking are done automatically as needed, depend- ing on road conditions.

NOTE For information on manual gate operation, please refer to

Sports mode on page 3-44.

CAUTION! Never shift into the P (PARK) or R

(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion. If the lever is shifted into the P (PARK) or R (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion, the transaxle may be damaged.

WARNING! Never move the selector lever to the N (NEU-

TRAL) position while driving since you could acci- dentally slip it into the P (PARK) or R(REVERSE) position, damaging the transaxle.

To prevent the vehicle from rolling when stopped on a slope, the engine should be started in the P (PARK) position, not in N (NEUTRAL).

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in N (NEUTRAL), or when shifting into or out of N (NEUTRAL), to prevent rolling.

BK0121200US.book 43

3-44

Features and controls

3

Sports mode N00514400387

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the selector lever from the D position into the manual gate. To return to D range operation, push the selector lever back into the main gate. In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rapidly simply by mov- ing the selector lever backward and forward. Sports mode allows gear shifts with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Manual gate

+ (SHIFT UP) Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.

- (SHIFT DOWN) Pull the lever backward once to shift down one gear.

NOTE In sports mode, only the 4 forward gears can be selected.

To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector lever to the R (REVERSE) or P (PARK) position in the main gate.

To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gear shifts when the selector lever is operated, such as 4th gear at low speed.

In sports mode, downward shifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.

When pulling away from a standstill on a slippery road, push the selector lever forward to the + (SHIFT UP) posi- tion. This causes the transaxle to select 2nd gear, which is better for safe driving on slippery roads. Push the selector lever to the - (SHIFT DOWN) side to shift back to 1st gear.

SHIFT DOWN

SHIFT UP

CAUTION! Upward shifts do not take place automatically in

sports mode. The driver must make upward shifts in accordance with prevailing road conditions, making sure the engine rpm remains below the red zone on the tachometer.

By rapidly moving the selector lever backwards (SHIFT DOWN) twice, it is possible to skip one gear (i.e., 3rd to 1st or 4th to 2nd). Since sudden engine deceleration or acceleration can cause a loss of trac- tion, downshifts must be made carefully in accor- dance with the vehicles speed.

BK0121200US.book 44

Features and controls

3-45

3

Move the selector lever gently between the manual and main gates and between positions in the manual gate. Excessive force could damage the selector lever.

When sports mode is selected, the D indicator goes out.

Sports mode indicator In sports mode, the currently selected gear is indicated by the indicator shown on the instrument cluster.

Operation of the automatic transaxle N00514500290

CAUTION! Before selecting a gear with the engine running and

the vehicle stationary, fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the gear is engaged, especially when the engine speed is high, at fast idle or with the air conditioning operating, the brakes should only be released when you are ready to drive away.

Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at all times. Using the left foot could cause driver movement delay in case of an emergency.

To prevent sudden acceleration, never run the engine at high rpms when shifting from the P (PARK) or N (NEUTRAL) position.

Operating the accelerator pedal while the other foot is resting on the brake pedal will affect braking effi- ciency and may cause premature wear of brake pads.

Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal pressed. This can damage the transaxle. Also, when the vehicle is stationary, the engine revo- lutions may not rise to the same revolutions as mea- sured in normal starting even if the accelerator pedal is depressed while the brake pedal is being pressed.

BK0121200US.book 45

3-46

Features and controls

3

Passing acceleration N00514900047

To gain extra acceleration in D (DRIVE) position (when passing another vehicle) push the accelerator to the floor. The automatic transaxle will automatically downshift.

NOTE In sports mode, downshifts do not take place when the

accelerator is depressed all the way to the floor.

Waiting N00515000058

For short waiting periods, such as at traffic lights, the vehicle can be left in gear and held stationary with the service brake. For longer waiting periods with the engine running, the selec- tor lever should be placed in the N (NEUTRAL) position.

Use the selector lever in the correct shift position in accordance with driving conditions. Never coast downhill backward in the driving shift position {D (DRIVE) or sports mode} or coast for- ward in the R (REVERSE) position. Engine stopping and Increased brake pedal and steering effort could lead to an accident.

CAUTION!

CAUTION! To avoid transaxle overheating, never try to keep

your vehicle stationary on a hill by using the acceler- ator pedal. Always apply the parking brake and/or service brake.

Unexpected acceleration may occur if the selector lever is in a position other than P (PARK) or N (NEUTRAL). Prior to moving off after having stopped the vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in D (DRIVE) position or Sports mode position.

BK0121200US.book 46

Features and controls

3-47

3

Parking N00515100017

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then move the selector lever to the P (PARK) position.

When the automatic transaxle makes no speed change N00515300165

If the transaxle does not change gears while driving, or your vehicle does not pick up enough speed when starting on an uphill slope, it may be that there is something unusual happen- ing in the transaxle, causing a safety device to activate. Have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

1. If your vehicle has difficulty moving uphill, select the 2nd gear of the sports mode. This method might not work depending on the type of transaxle malfunction.

2. Once the vehicle is moving on a level road, move the selector lever back to D (DRIVE).

NOTE When the N indicator in the instrument cluster blinks, it

means that there is an abnormal condition in the transaxle. Refer to Selector lever position indicator/N indicator on page 3-42.

Service brake N00517500246

Brake pedal Overuse of the brake can cause poor brake response and pre- mature wear of the brake pads. When driving down a long or steep hill, use engine braking by shifting the transaxle into a lower gear of the sports mode.

WARNING! Do not leave any objects near the brake pedal or let

a floor mat slide under it; doing so could prevent the full pedal stroke that would be necessary in an emer- gency. Make sure that the pedal can be operated freely at all times. Make sure the floor mat is securely held in place.

CAUTION! It is important not to drive the vehicle with your foot

resting on the brake pedal when braking is not required. This practice can result in very high brake temperatures, premature pad wear, and possible damage to the brakes.

BK0121200US.book 47

3-48

Features and controls

3

Power brakes N00517600319

Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes for more braking force with minimal brake pedal effort. Your brakes are designed to operate at full capacity, even if the power assist is lost. If the power assist is lost, the effort needed to press the brake pedal is greater. If you should loose the power assist for some reason, the brakes will still work. If the power brake unit or either of the two brake hydraulic sys- tems stops working properly, the rest of the brake system will still work, but the vehicle will not slow down as quickly. You will know this has happened if you find you need to depress the brake pedal down further, or harder when slowing down or stopping, or if the brake warning light comes on.

Brake pad wear alarm N00532500120

The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a metallic squeal when the brake pads have worn down enough to need service. If you hear this sound, have the brake pads replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

WARNING! Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. Keep the

engine running whenever your vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the engine while driving, the power brake booster will stop working and your brakes will not work as well.

If the power assist is lost or if either brake hydraulic system stops working properly, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice immediately.

WARNING! Driving with worn brake pads will make it harder to

stop, and can cause an accident.

BK0121200US.book 48

Features and controls

3-49

3

Anti-lock braking system N00517900253

The anti-lock braking system helps prevent the wheels from locking up when braking. This helps you keep control of your vehicle and its direction.

Driving hints When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden braking), steer-

ing is slightly different from normal driving conditions. Use the steering wheel carefully.

Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. If your vehicle is equipped with the anti-lock braking system, leave a greater braking distance when: Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads. Driving on uneven road surfaces.

Operation of anti-lock braking system is not restricted to situations where brakes are applied suddenly. This system may also prevent the wheels from locking when you drive over manholes, steel roadwork plates, road markings, or any uneven road surface.

When the anti-lock braking system is in use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrating and hear a unique sound. You may also feel as if the pedal resists being pressed. In this situation, simply hold the brake pedal down firmly. Do not pump the brake, which will result in reduced braking performance.

CAUTION! The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent acci-

dents. It is your responsibility to take safety precau- tions and to drive carefully.

To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking system, be sure all four wheels and tires are the same size and the same type.

BK0121200US.book 49

3-50

Features and controls

3

Anti-lock braking system warning light N00531600427

This light comes on in the event of a malfunction in the anti- lock braking system. It will also come on as a self-check for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion. Always make sure that the light goes out before beginning to drive.

If the warning light illuminates while driving N00531700369

Since there is always a risk of your vehicle becoming unstable if you apply the brakes suddenly, be sure to brake gently and do not attempt high-speed driving. Be sure to stop the vehicle in a safe place. Test the system by restart- ing the engine and driving at a speed of about 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

If the light goes out, there is no abnormal condition. If the light does not go out after driving as instructed here, or if it comes on again, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning. Only the ordinary braking system is function- ing. If this happens, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and have the system checked as soon as possible.

NOTE After your vehicle is driven a short distance after starting

the engine, you will hear a whining sound and the sound of a motor operating coming from the engine compart- ment. These are the normal sounds the anti-lock braking system makes when performing a self-check. It does not indicate a malfunction.

The anti-lock braking system can be used after the vehicle has reached a speed over approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops working when the vehicle slows below approxi- mately 3 mph (5 km/h).

After driving on snow or icy roads, remove any snow and ice which may have been left around the wheels. On vehi- cles that have an anti-lock braking system, be careful not to damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the cables located at each wheel.

CAUTION! If the anti-lock braking system warning light comes

on and stays on after starting the engine or while driving, it means that the anti-lock braking system is not working and that only the standard brake sys- tem is available. (The standard brake system will still work properly.) If this happens, take your vehi- cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

or

BK0121200US.book 50

Features and controls

3-51

3

Active stability control (ASC) N00559100088

The active stability control (ASC) takes overall control of the anti-lock braking system, traction control function and skid control function to help maintain the vehicles control and trac- tion. Also refer to the following pages on the anti-lock braking system, traction control function and skid control function.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) P.3-49 Traction control function P.3-52 Skid control function P.3-53

Front

Rear

CAUTION! Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC cannot

prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle. This system, like any other system, has limits and cannot help you to maintain traction and control of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driving can lead to accidents. It is the drivers responsibility to drive carefully. This means taking into account the traffic, road and environmental conditions.

Be sure to use the same specified type and size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the ASC may not work properly.

Do not install any aftermarket limited slip differen- tial (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC may stop func- tioning properly.

BK0121200US.book 51

3-52

Features and controls

3

NOTE A whining sound may be heard from the engine compart-

ment in the following situations. The sound is associated with the ASC self-check operations. It does not indicate a malfunction. When the ignition key is set to the ON position. When the vehicle is driven for a while after the engine is

turned on. When the ASC is activated, you may feel a vibration in

the vehicle body or hear a whining sound from the engine compartment. This indicates that the system is operating normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.

When the anti-lock braking system warning light is illu- minated, the ASC is not active.

Traction control function N00559200063

On slippery surfaces, the traction control function prevents the drive wheels from spinning excessively, thus helping the vehi- cle to start moving from a stopped condition. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the vehicle turns while pressing the acceleration pedal.

CAUTION! When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy road, be

sure to install snow tires and drive the vehicle at moderate speeds.

BK0121200US.book 52

Features and controls

3-53

3

Skid control function N00546800036

The skid control function is designed to help the driver main- tain control of the vehicle on slippery roads or during rapid steering maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine output and the brake on each wheel.

NOTE The skid control function operates at speeds of about 9

mph (15 km/h) or higher.

ASC OFF switch N00559400094

The ASC is automatically activated when the ignition key is turned to the ON position. You can deactivate the system by pressing down the ASC OFF switch for 3 seconds or longer. When the ASC is deactivated, the indicator will be illumi- nated. To reactivate the ASC, momentarily press the ASC OFF switch; the indicator is turned off.

CAUTION! For safety reasons, the ASC OFF switch should be

operated when your vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in normal

circumstances.

BK0121200US.book 53

3-54

Features and controls

3

NOTE Using the ASC OFF switch turns off both the skid control

function and the traction control function. When moving out of mud, sand or fresh snow, pressing

the accelerator pedal may not allow the engine speed to increase. In such situations, temporarily deactivate the ASC, using the ASC OFF switch.

If you continue to press the ASC OFF switch after the ASC is turned off, the mistaken operation protection function will activate and the ASC will turn back on. After the mistaken operation protection function is acti- vated, it will not be possible to turn the ASC off. To turn the system off again, return the ignition key to the ACC or LOCK position, restart the engine and press the ASC OFF switch.

ASC indicator, ASC OFF indicator N00546900024

The indicators should illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the ON position, and should turn off after a few seconds. If the indicator stays on or does not illuminate when the igni- tion key is turned to the ON position, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

indicator blinks when the ASC is operating. indicator is illuminated when the ASC is deactivated.

BK0121200US.book 54

Features and controls

3-55

3

NOTE When a spare tire has been put on your vehicle, the grip-

ping ability of the tire will be lower, making it more likely that the indicator will blink.

CAUTION!

When indicator blinks, the ASC is operating, which means that the road is slippery or that your vehicles wheels are beginning to slip. If this hap- pens, drive slower.

CAUTION! If an abnormal condition occurs in the system while

driving, the and indicators will illuminate at the same time, or the indicator will blink. In these cases, follow these procedures: [If the and indicators continuously illuminate] Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the

engine. Restart the engine again and check whether the and indicators go out. If these indicators go out, there is no abnormal condition. If the and indicators remain on even after your vehicle is driven a short distance after re- starting the engine, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

[If the indicator blinks] If the temperature of the braking system increases

excessively, due to continuous brake control on a slippery road surface, the indicator will blinks and operation of the traction control function will be suspended to protect the brake system. (Normal operation of the vehicle will not be affected.) Park your vehicle in a safe place. When the temperature in the braking system has come down, the indi- cator will be turned off and the traction control function will start operating again.

CAUTION!

BK0121200US.book 55

3-56

Features and controls

3

Power steering system N00518000189

The power steering system has mechanical steering capability in case the power assist is lost. If the hydraulic pressure is interrupted for some reason (such as engine stalling), you will still be able to steer your vehicle. If the power assist is lost, you will notice it takes much more effort to steer and that there is much more free play in the steering wheel. If this happens, take your vehicle to an autho- rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

CAUTION! If the vehicle is towed with the ignition key in the

ON position and only the front wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the ground, the ASC may operate, resulting in an accident. When towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep the igni- tion key in the LOCK or ACC position. When towing the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, keep the ignition key in the ACC position. Refer to Towing on page 6-21.

WARNING! Never turn off the engine while the vehicle is mov-

ing, or your ability to steer the vehicle may be seri- ously reduced.

CAUTION! Do not leave the steering wheel turned all the way in

one direction. This can cause damage to the power steering system.

BK0121200US.book 56

Features and controls

3-57

3

Cruise control N00518300469

Cruise control is an automatic speed control system. It lets you keep the same driving speed. Cruise control can be used at speeds of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. It is especially use- ful for freeway driving. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

NOTE Cruise control may not be able to keep your speed on

uphills or downhills. Your speed may drop on a steep uphill. You may have to

use the accelerator pedal if you want to stay at your set speed.

Your speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep downhill. You must use the brake to control your speed. If your speed increases too much, turn off the cruise control. (Refer to To deactivate on page 3-62.)

A - Main switch B - Cruise control lever

CAUTION! For safety reasons, deactivate cruise control system

using the main switch (A) when you are not using the cruise control system. (Refer to To deactivate on page 3-62.)

Cruise control is not recommended when driving conditions will not allow you to stay at the same speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet, or slippery, or on a steep downhill.

CAUTION!

BK0121200US.book 57

3-58

Features and controls

3

Cruise control indicator N00550100173

This indicator will come on when the cruise control main switch is ON.

To activate N00518400196

1. Momentarily push in the main switch (A) at the end of the cruise control lever.

BK0121200US.book 58

Features and controls

3-59

3

2. Pull the lever (B) down while driving at the desired speed.

NOTE If the main switch is on when the ignition key is turned

off, cruise control will be on automatically the next time you start the engine. The CRUISE indicator will also be on. You will need to reset the speed however, if you want to use cruise control.

If the battery voltage is insufficient, the memory data for the main switch will be erased. As a result, the CRUISE indicator may not come on when you restart the engine. If this happens, push in the main switch once again to acti- vate the system.

To increase the set speed N00518500243

There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.

Cruise control lever Pull the cruise control lever up and hold it while driving at the set speed, and your speed will then gradually increase. When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your cruising speed is now set. To increase your speed in small amounts, press the cruise con- trol lever up for less than 1 second and release it. Each time you press the lever up, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

BK0121200US.book 59

3-60

Features and controls

3

Accelerator pedal Press the accelerator pedal to reach your desired speed. Pull the cruise control lever down for a moment, then release it.

To decrease the set speed N00518600114

There are 2 ways to reduce the set speed.

Cruise control lever Pull the cruise control lever down and hold it while driving at the set speed, and you will slow down (coast) gradually. When your desired low speed is reached, release the lever.

To slow down in small amounts, pull the cruise control lever down for less than 1 second and release it. Each time you press the lever down, your vehicle will slow down by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

BK0121200US.book 60

Features and controls

3-61

3

Brake pedal Press the brake pedal (which disengages the cruise control), then pull the cruise control lever down momentarily to set a new desired cruise speed.

To accelerate for passing N00518700098

Press the accelerator pedal as you would normally. When you release the pedal, the cruise control will return to your set speed.

BK0121200US.book 61

3-62

Features and controls

3

To deactivate N00518800523

The cruise control can be turned off as follows: Push the main switch (A) at the end of the lever.

(Main switch OFF) Pull the cruise control lever (B) toward you. Depress the brake pedal.

The cruise control can be turned off automatically in any of the following ways:

When your speed slows to about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more below the set speed because of a hill, etc.

When your speed slows to about 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.

When the active stability control starts operating. Refer to Active stability control (ASC) on page 3-51.

WARNING! Although the cruise control can be turned off by

moving the selector lever to the N position, never move the selector lever to the N position while driving. You would have no engine braking and could cause a serious accident.

BK0121200US.book 62

Features and controls

3-63

3

To resume the set speed N00518900120

If the speed memory has not been erased, resume the previ- ously set speed by pulling the cruise control lever up while driving at a speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or higher.

Under either of the following conditions, however, using the switch does not allow you to resume the previously set speed. In these situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:

The ignition key is turned OFF. The main switch is turned OFF.

Tire pressure monitoring system N00530200341

The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels to monitor the tire inflation pres- sures. The system only indicates when a tire is significantly under-inflated.

BK0121200US.book 63

3-64

Features and controls

3

NOTE The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for

regularly checking tire inflation pressures. Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures as described in Tires on page 7-19.

The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is installed in the illustrated location. Replace grommet (B) with a new one when the tire is replaced. For details, please contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

WARNING! The compact spare wheel does not have a tire infla-

tion pressure sensor. When the spare tire is used, the tire pressure moni- toring system will not work properly. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible to replace or repair the original tire.

BK0121200US.book 64

Features and controls

3-65

3

Tire pressure monitoring system warning light N00554800080

When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, this light normally illuminates and goes off a few seconds later. If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for the spare tire) is signifi- cantly under-inflated, however, this light will remain illumi- nated while the key is in the ON position. Refer to If the warning light illuminates while driving on page 3-67 and take the necessary measures.

CAUTION! If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light

does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the ON position, it means that the tire pressure monitoring system is not working properly. Have the system inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. In such situations, a malfunctioning of the system may be preventing the monitoring of the tire pres- sure. Avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and high-speed driving.

If a malfunction is detected in the tire pressure mon- itoring system, the tire pressure monitoring system warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. The warning light will issue further warnings each time the engine is restarted as long as the malfunction exists. Check to see whether the warning light goes off after few minutes of driving. If it then goes off during driving, there is no prob- lem. However, if the warning light does not go off, or if it blinks again when the engine is restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. In such situations, a malfunctioning of the system may be preventing the monitoring of the tire pres- sure. For safety reasons, when the warning light appears while driving, avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and high-speed driving.

CAUTION!

BK0121200US.book 65

3-66

Features and controls

3 Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure rec- ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure tell- tale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, includ- ing the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac- ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

BK0121200US.book 66

Features and controls

3-67

3

If the warning light illuminates while driving N00532800370

1. Avoiding hard braking, sharp steering maneuvers and high speeds. You should stop and adjust the tires to the proper inflation pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at the same time. Refer to Tires on page 7-19.

NOTE When inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, do not

apply excessive force to the valve stem to avoid breakage. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always

reinstall the valve cap on the valve stem. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve, resulting in damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor.

Do not use metal valve caps, which may cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion and damage of the tire inflation pressure sensors.

Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes of driving.

2. If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light remains illuminated after you have been driving for about 20 minutes after you adjust the tire inflation pressure, one or more of the tires may have a puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a puncture, have it repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.

NOTE To avoid the risk of damage to the tire inflation pressure

sensors, have any punctured tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by your warranty.

Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray on any tire. Such a spray could damage the tire inflation pressure sen- sors. Have any puncture repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

WARNING! If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light

illuminates while you are driving, avoid hard brak- ing, sharp steering maneuvers and high speeds. Driving with an under-inflated tire adversely affects vehicle performance and can result in an accident.

CAUTION! If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with the

spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire could lead to an accident.

The tire pressure monitoring system warning light may not illuminate immediately in the event of a tire blowout or rapid leak.

BK0121200US.book 67

3-68

Features and controls

3

The tire pressure monitoring system may not work normally in the following circumstances:

A wireless facility or device using the same frequency is near the vehicle.

Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders and/or on the wheels.

The tire inflation pressure sensors battery is exhausted. Wheels other than Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels are

being used. Wheels that are not fitted with tire inflation pressure sen-

sors are being used. Wheels whose ID codes are not memorized by the vehicle

are used. Compact spare tire is fitted on a road wheel. A window tint that affects the radio wave signals is

installed.

NOTE Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambient tempera-

ture. If the vehicle is subjected to large variations in ambi- ent temperature, the tire inflation pressures may be under- inflated (causing the warning light to come on) when the ambient temperature is relatively low. If the warning light comes on, adjust the tire inflation pressure.

Whenever the tires and wheels are replaced with new ones

N00532900065

If you use new wheels with new tire inflation pressure sensors, their ID codes must be programmed into the tire pressure mon- itoring system. Have tire and wheel replacement performed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel replacement is not done by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by your warranty.

CAUTION! The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent the

proper fit of the tire inflation pressure sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of the sensors.

BK0121200US.book 68

Features and controls

3-69

3

General information N00533000148

Your tire pressure monitoring system operates on a radio fre- quency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS- 210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

Rear-view camera (if so equipped) N00546200014

When the selector lever is in the R (REVERSE) position with the ignition switch in the ON position, the rear-view image will be displayed on the screen of the Mitsubishi Multi- communication System in the center panel. When the selector lever is shifted out of the R (REVERSE) position, the screen will return to the previous display.

CAUTION! Changes or modifications not expressly approved by

the manufacturer for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

WARNING! Never rely solely on the rear-view camera to clear

the area behind your vehicle. Always check visually behind and all around your vehicle for persons, ani- mals, obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to do so can result in vehicle damage, serious injury or death.

The rear-view camera is an aid system for backing up, but it is not a substitute for your visual confir- mation.

The view on the screen is limited, and objects out- side the view, such as under the bumper or around either corner of the bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen.

BK0121200US.book 69

3-70

Features and controls

3

Location of rear-view camera The rear-view camera (A) is in the trunk lid.

Screen image Reference guide marks, upper surface of the rear bumper (A) and a part of the trunk lid (C) are displayed on the screen.

Five guide marks in red (B) indicates approximately 20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper.

Each row of green guide marks (1 to 4) indicates approxi- mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the vehicle body.

Every single green guide mark indicates distance from the rear bumper.

CAUTION! If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image cannot be

obtained. As necessary, rinse the lens with clean water and gently wipe with a clean, soft cloth.

To avoid damaging the camera; Do not rub the cover excessively or polish it by

using an abrasive compound. Do not disassemble the camera. Do not splash hot water directly on the lens. Do not spray the camera and its surroundings with

high-pressure water. Make sure that the trunk lid is securely closed

when backing up.

1: Approximately at the rear edge of the rear bumper 2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm) 3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm) 4: Approximately 118 inches (300 cm)

BK0121200US.book 70

Features and controls

3-71

3

NOTE Mirror image is displayed on the screen. It is possible to set the display language of the screen to

English, Spanish or French. For details, please refer to the separated owners manual for Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System.

Under certain circumstances, it may become difficult to see an image on the screen, even when the system is func- tioning correctly. In a dark area, such as at night. When water drops or condensation are on the lens. When sun light or headlights shine directly into the lens.

When the camera picks up extremely bright light, such as sunlight reflected off the rear bumper, a bright vertical line may appear on the screen.

CAUTION! The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle lens. As a

result, images and distances shown on the screen are not exact.

Actual distance may be different from distance indi- cated by the guide marks on the screen, depending on the loading condition of the vehicle and road sur- face condition.

BK0121200US.book 71

3-72

Features and controls

3

Instrument cluster N00519000287

1- Tachometer 2- Speedometer 3- Fuel gauge 4- Odometer/Trip odometer 5- Trip odometer reset button 6- Engine coolant temperature gauge

BK0121200US.book 72

Features and controls

3-73

3

Speedometer N00519100015

The speedometer shows your vehicles speed.

Tachometer N00519200032

The tachometer shows engine revolutions per minute. This allows the driver to determine the most efficient gear range and engine speed combinations. This gauge also assists in evaluating engine performance.

Odometer/Trip odometer N00519500338

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, an ODO or TRIP indicator is displayed.

CAUTION! The red zone indicates an engine speed beyond the

range of safe operation.

Select the correct gear to control the engine speed so that the tachometer indicator does not enter the red zone.

1- Odometer 2- Trip odometer 3- Reset button

BK0121200US.book 73

3-74

Features and controls

3

Every time the reset button (3) is pressed lightly (less than one second), the indicators are changed.

ODO-Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has traveled.

TRIP-Trip odometer The trip odometer shows the distance traveled since the last time it was reset. There are two trip odometer displays: and . TRIP can be used to measure the distance traveled since the current trip began. At the same time, TRIP can be used to measure the dis- tance from a second location.

To reset the trip meter To zero the counter, press and hold the reset button for more than one second. Only the currently displayed value will be reset. If TRIP is displayed, for example, only TRIP will be reset.

NOTE Both TRIP and TRIP can measure trips up to

9999.9 miles/kilometers. The odometer and tripmeter indications remain visible for

a short while after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Subsequently, they become visible for a short while when any of the following steps is taken. Any door is opened. The odometer/tripmeter reset button is pressed. The ignition switch is turned to the ACC position.

When disconnecting the battery terminal for a long time, the memory of tripmeter display TRIP and are cleared, and the display returns to 0.

BK0121200US.book 74

Features and controls

3-75

3

Fuel gauge N00519600052

This gauge shows the amount of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition key is turned to the ON position.

NOTE It takes a little time after refueling for the gauge to register

the newly added fuel. If you refuel when the ignition key is in the ON posi-

tion, the gauge may differ from the actual level.

Fuel tank filler door mark The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank filler door is located on the left side of the vehicle (Refer to Filling the fuel tank on page 1-4).

Low-fuel warning light N00532000239

The warning light comes on with the ignition key in the ON position when the fuel level is getting low. Refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the

tank, the low-fuel warning light may indicate incorrectly.

CAUTION! Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level. Run-

ning out of gas could cause damage to the catalytic converter.

BK0121200US.book 75

3-76

Features and controls

3

Engine coolant temperature gauge N00519700037

This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature. If the tem- perature is low when the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the indicator will remain at the C (cold) position until the engine begins to warm up.

The indicator will normally stay near the center while driving, but may rise slightly in stop-and-go traffic or when the engine is under a heavy load.

CAUTION! Take care to keep the engine operating temperature

within the normal range while driving. If the indica- tor enters the H (hot) position, the engine is over- heating (Refer to Engine overheating on page 6- 5).

BK0121200US.book 76

Features and controls

3-77

3

Indicator and warning light package N00519800780

1- Engine malfunction indicator (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or Check engine light) P.3-79

2- Cruise control indicator P.3-58 3- High beam indicator P.3-78 4- Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning lights P.3-78 5- Front fog light indicator (if so equipped) P.3-78 6- Automatic transaxle position indicator P.3-42 7- Active stability control (ASC) indicator P.3-54 8- Active stability control (ASC) OFF indicator P.3-54 9- Drivers seat belt reminder/warning light P.2-20

10- Door-ajar warning light P.3-80 11- Oil pressure warning light P.3-80 12- Charging system warning light P.3-80 13- Immobilizer indicator P.3-3

14- Tire pressure monitoring system warning light P.3-65 15- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning light

P.2-47 16- Anti-lock braking system warning light P.3-50 17- Brake warning light P.3-78 18- Low-fuel warning light P.3-75

BK0121200US.book 77

3-78

Features and controls

3

Indicator N00519900042

Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning lights N00520000157

The arrows will flash in time with the corresponding exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is used.

Both arrows will flash when the hazard warning flasher switch is pressed.

NOTE If the indicator light flashes faster than usual or if the indi-

cator light stays on without flashing, check for a malfunc- tioning turn signal light bulb or turn signal connection.

High beam indicator N00520100073

A blue light comes on when the headlights are on high beam.

Front fog light indicator (if so equipped) N00520200104

This indicator comes on while the front fog lights are on.

Warning lights N00520300118

Brake warning light N00520400252

This light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position (engine off). When the engine is started, the light should go off. The light will illuminate under the following conditions:

When the parking brake lever is engaged. When the brake fluid level in the reservoir falls to a low

level. When the brake circuit is not operating correctly.

Before driving your vehicle, release the parking brake and make certain that the brake warning light has gone out.

CAUTION! Brake performance or your ability to control the

vehicle may be compromised or the vehicle may become unstable if the brakes are applied suddenly in the following situations: The brake warning light does not illuminate when

the parking brake is applied or does not turn off when the parking brake is released.

The brake warning light remains illuminated dur- ing driving.

If any of the above situations occur, stop the vehi- cle in a safe location, avoiding any sudden brake application, and contact your nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

BK0121200US.book 78

Features and controls

3-79

3Engine malfunction indicator (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or Check engine light)

N00520500468

This indicator is a part of the onboard diagnostic (OBD) sys- tem which monitors the emissions, engine, and automatic transaxle control systems. If a problem is detected in one of these systems, this indicator comes on. When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, this indicator normally comes on and goes off a few seconds later.

This indicator will come on if the fuel tank filler cap is not properly tightened. If the indicator comes on and stays on after refueling, stop the engine and check that the cap is properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise until you hear clicking sounds.) If this indicator does not go off after several seconds or lights up while driving, have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

NOTE Do not disconnect the battery cable when the Engine mal-

function indicator (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or Check engine light) is on. The engine electronic control module stores critical OBD information (especially exhaust emission data), which may be lost if the battery cable is disconnected while the engine malfunction indicator is on. This will make it diffi- cult to diagnose the cause of future problems.

The vehicle should be brought to a stop in the fol- lowing manner when brake performance has deteri- orated while driving. Press the brake pedal harder than usual. Should the brakes fail, shift down to a lower gear

to reduce your speed and slowly pull the parking brake lever to park your vehicle. Press the brake pedal to operate your rear brake lights to alert vehicles behind you.

CAUTION! CAUTION! Driving for a long time with the engine malfunction

indicator on may cause more damage to the emission control system. This could also affect fuel economy and drivability.

If this indicator does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position, have the system checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

If the indicator comes on while the engine is run- ning, avoid driving at high speeds. During vehicle operation with the indicator on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle is stationary with the indicator on, you must depress the brake pedal more firmly than usual since the engine idling speed is higher than usual and the vehicle with an automatic transaxle has a stronger tendency to creep forward.

BK0121200US.book 79

3-80

Features and controls

3

Charging system warning light N00520600209

This light comes on in the event of a malfunction in the charg- ing system or when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion (engine off). When the engine is started, the light should go out. Check to make sure that the light has gone out before driving.

Oil pressure warning light N00520700170

This light comes on when the engine oil pressure is below nor- mal. If the light stays on while driving, stop the engine as soon as possible. Do not run the engine until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.

Door-ajar warning light and buzzer N00520900299

This light comes on when any door is open or not completely closed. When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 mph (8 km/h) and any door is open or ajar, a tone will sound 4 times and the warning light will flash 4 times to inform the driver that a door is not properly shut.

NOTE The light goes out automatically after about 30 minutes.

Refer to Interior light auto-shutoff function (dome light and other lights) on page 3-130.

For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- nication System, Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys- tem can be used to stop the warning lamp from flashing and to stop the tone from functioning. For details, refer to the separate owners manual.

CAUTION! If the charging light stays on after the engine has

started, the battery charging system may be mal- functioning. In this case, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and have the system checked.

CAUTION! If this light comes on when the engine oil level is not

low, have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

This warning light does not show the amount of oil in the crankcase. This can only be determined by checking the oil level with the dipstick with the engine turned off.

CAUTION! Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar warn-

ing light is off.

BK0121200US.book 80

Features and controls

3-81

3

Combination headlights and dimmer switch N00522500622

Headlights Rotate the switch to operate the lights.

If your vehicle is equipped with daytime running lights, the combinations of switch operations and illuminated lights differ in accordance with the following conditions.

[When the engine is started and the parking brake is released]

The daytime running lights come on. (if so equipped)

NOTE Once the daytime running lights (if so equipped) have

been turned on, the illuminated lights do not go off until the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK or ACC position.

[The engine is not running, or the engine is running but the parking brake has not been released]

The engine can be started with the headlights off when the vehicle is stationary.

NOTE Do not leave the headlights and other lights on for a long

period of time when the engine is not running. The battery will run down.

OFF Headlights illuminate dimly

Headlights illuminate dimly and Parking, tail, front and rear side-marker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on

Headlights and other lights on

OFF All lights off

Parking, tail, front and rear side-marker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on

Headlights and other lights on

BK0121200US.book 81

3-82

Features and controls

3

When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy. This is the same as when window glass mists up on a humid day, and does not indicate a problem. When the light is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog. However, if water col- lects inside the light, have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Light auto-cutout function (headlights and other lights)

N00532600495

If the ignition key is turned to LOCK or ACC posi- tion or removed from the ignition switch and the drivers door is opened with the light switch in the or position, the lights automatically turn off. If the drivers door is opened after the key is removed

from the ignition switch, a high-pitched constant tone will sound to remind you to turn off the lights.

If the drivers door is opened with the key in the ignition switch, a low-pitched tone will sound to remind you to remove the key.

If the ignition key is turned to LOCK or ACC posi- tion or removed from the ignition switch with the drivers door closed and the light switch in the or position, the lights will stay on for about 3 minutes and then turn off automatically.

NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-

nication System, Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys- tem can be used to deactivate the light auto-cutout function. For details, refer to the separate owners manual.

When you want to keep the lights on: If the light switch is turned to the or position again after the engine is turned off, the 3 minute auto-cutout function described above will not work. The lights (the parking lights, tail lights and license plate lights) will stay on and will not turn off automatically.

NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-

nication System, Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys- tem can be used to keep the light on for approximately 3 minutes after you leave the vehicle. For details, refer to the separate owners manual.

If the light auto-cutout function is reprogrammed, the 3 min- utes auto-cutout function can be activated using the following steps.

1. After turning the ignition key to the LOCK or ACC position or removing it from the ignition switch, set the light switch to the OFF position.

2. Put the light switch back to the or position again and get out of the vehicle.

BK0121200US.book 82

Features and controls

3-83

3

3. The light will automatically turn off after 3 minutes.

NOTE When the drivers door is opened, a continuous high-

pitched tone will sound if the key has been removed; a continuous low-pitched tone will sound if the key is in the ignition switch. The tone stops sounding when the drivers door is closed.

Headlight reminder buzzer N00549800141

If the drivers door is opened with the key in the LOCK or ACC position or removed from the ignition switch while the lights are on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn off the lights. The lights will turn off automatically and so will the tone. Or you can turn the light switch to the OFF position to stop the tone.

Dimmer (high/low beam change) N00549900126

To change the headlights from high beam to low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal lever to fully toward you (1). Switch the headlights to low beam as a courtesy whenever there are oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue light in the instrument cluster indi- cates when the headlights are on high beam.

BK0121200US.book 83

3-84

Features and controls

3

Headlight flasher N00550000169

You can flash the high beams by pulling the lever gently toward you (2). The lights will go back to normal when you let go. While the high beam is on, you will see a blue light on the instrument panel.

NOTE You can flash the high beams by pulling the lever toward

you, even if the light switch is off. If you turn the lights off with the headlights set to high-

beam illumination, the headlights are automatically returned to their low-beam setting when the light switch is next turned to the position.

Turn signal lever N00522600434

When changing lanes, or to making a gradual turn, hold the lever in the lane change position (1). It will return to the neu- tral position when you let go. Use the full position (2) when making a normal turn. The lever will return to the neutral posi- tion when the turn is complete. There may be times when the lever does not return to the neutral position. This usually hap- pens when the steering wheel is turned only slightly. You can easily return the lever by hand.

BK0121200US.book 84

Features and controls

3-85

3

NOTE A light in the instrument panel flashes to show when the

front and rear turn signal lights are working properly. If this light flashes faster than usual, check for a burned out lamp bulb or malfunctioning connection. If the panel light does not come on when the lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a burned out bulb in the panel. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- nication System, Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys- tem can be used to select whether the tone will sound or not sound when the turn signal lights are activated. For details, refer to the separate owners manual.

Hazard warning flasher switch N00522700262

If you press the flasher switch, the front and rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and so will the hazard warning lights. This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion, except for emergencies. If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers will keep work- ing after the ignition key is removed.

NOTE If you keep the flashers on for several hours with the

engine turned off, the battery will run down. For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-

nication System, Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys- tem can be used to select whether the tone will sound or not sound when the hazard warning flashers are activated. For details, refer to the separate owners manual.

BK0121200US.book 85

3-86

Features and controls

3

Fog light switch (if so equipped) N00522800364

The fog lights illuminate only when the headlights are on low beam. Press the switch to illuminate. Press the switch again to turn the lights off. The indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate while the fog lights are on.

NOTE If the headlights are switched to high beam, the fog lights

will go out; they will illuminate again when the headlights are switched back to low beam.

If the light switch is rotated to the OFF or posi- tion while the front fog lights are illuminated, they will automatically turn off. They can be turned back on again by rotating the light switch back to position, and pressing the front fog light switch once again.

Do not use fog lamps except in conditions of fog, other- wise excessive lamp glare may temporarily blind oncom- ing vehicle drivers.

BK0121200US.book 86

Features and controls

3-87

3

Instrument panel light dimmer control N00522900176

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted by turning this control while the light switch is in the or position.

Wiper and washer switch N00523000549

Windshield wipers The windshield wipers wipe when the wiper lever is moved as shown in the illustration and the ignition key is in the ON or ACC position.

1- Bright 2- Dark

CAUTION! Always perform adjustments before driving.

Do not attempt to adjust while driving, as it could cause an accident.

MIST- Misting function The wipers will wipe one time

OFF- Off INT- Speed sensitive intermittent operation

Interval between wiper sweeps vary in accordance with vehicle speed.

LO- Slow HI- Fast

BK0121200US.book 87

3-88

Features and controls

3

NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-

nication System, Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys- tem can be used to enable and disable speed-sensitive operation of the wipers. For details, refer to the separate owners manual.

To adjust intermittent intervals With the lever in the INT (speed-sensitive) position, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted by turning the knob (A).

Misting function Move the lever in the direction of the arrow and release, and the wipers will operate once. Use this function when you are driving in mist or drizzle. If the lever is held in the upward position (MIST), the wipers continue operating until the lever is released.

1- Fast 2- Slow

BK0121200US.book 88

Features and controls

3-89

3

Windshield washer N00504600025

To turn on the windshield washer, pull the lever toward you with the ignition key in either the ON or ACC position. The wipers will wipe automatically several times when the washer fluid is sprayed.

To turn off the spray, release the lever.

Precautions to observe when using wipers and washers

N00523500225

NOTE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. This

could scratch the glass and wear the wiper blades prema- turely.

Before using the wipers in cold weather, check to be sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield. Using the wipers while the blades are frozen could cause the wiper motor to burn out.

If the wipers become blocked by ice or other deposits on the glass, the motor may still burn out even if the wiper switch is OFF. If deposits form on the windshield, park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and clean the glass so that the wipers can operate smoothly.

Avoid using the washer for more than 20 seconds at a time. Do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty or the pump may fail.

During cold weather, add a recommended washer solution that will not freeze in the washer reservoir. Otherwise the washer may not work or may be damaged.

CAUTION! If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer

fluid sprayed onto the glass might freeze, blocking your view. In cold weather, heat the glass with the defroster before using the washer.

BK0121200US.book 89

3-90

Features and controls

3

Replace the wiper blades when they are worn. Use the proper size replacement blades. If you have questions, ask your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Electric rear window defogger switch N00523700357

The electric rear window defogger can be used with the igni- tion key in the ON position. The indicator light (A) will come on when you press the elec- tric rear window defogger switch. Electric current will flow through the heating wires on the rear window to help clear away moisture or frost.

After about 17 minutes of operation, the system will shut off automatically. To switch the defogger OFF before 17 minutes have passed, press the switch again. The indicator light will go out and the defogger will turn off. If you need the defogger for more than 17 minutes, press the switch again. This will add 17 more minutes.

BK0121200US.book 90

Features and controls

3-91

3

NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, mist can

also be removed from the outside rearview mirrors when the rear window defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to Heated mirror on page 3-33.)

Horn switch N00523800101

To honk the horn, press near the mark on the steering wheel.

CAUTION! The rear window defogger is not designed to melt

snow. Remove any snow manually before using the rear window defogger.

Use the rear window defogger only after the engine has started and is running. Be sure to turn the defogger switch off immediately after the window is clear to save on battery power.

Do not place stickers, tape, or other items that are attached with adhesive over the grid wires on the rear window.

When cleaning the inside rear window, use a soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid wires.

BK0121200US.book 91

3-92

Features and controls

3

Hands-free Bluetooth cellular phone interface system with voice recognition (if so

equipped) N00506400102

The Hands-free Bluetooth cellular phone interface system with voice recognition (Bluetooth HFP) uses a wireless com- munication technology known as Bluetooth to allow you to make hands-free calls in your vehicle using your Bluetooth

compatible cellular phone with Hands-free profile. The system is equipped with a voice recognition function, which lets you make hands-free calls by simple switch opera- tions and voice command operations using a defined voice tree.

The Bluetooth HFP can be used when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. To use the Bluetooth HFP, you should first connect your Bluetooth compatible cellular phone to the Bluetooth HFP. Refer to Pairing a cellular phone on page 3-100.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.

NOTE You cannot use the Bluetooth HFP if your cellular phone

has a dead battery or is turned off. Hands-free calls will not be possible in areas outside your

cellular phone service area or locations where a signal cannot reach your phone.

WARNING!

Although the Bluetooth HFP allows you to make hands-free calls, if you choose to use the cellular phone while driving, you must not allow that usage to distract you in the safe operation of your vehicle. Anything, including cellular phone usage, that dis- tracts you from the safe operation of your vehicle increases your risk of an accident. Refer to and fol- low all state and local laws in your area regarding cellular phone usage while driving.

BK0121200US.book 92

Features and controls

3-93

3

Overhead console control switch N00546700048

PHONE button Press this button when an incoming call is received to

answer the telephone. When another call is received during a call, press this but-

ton to put the first caller on hold and talk to the new caller. In such circumstances, you can press the button briefly

to switch between callers. You will switch to the first caller and the other caller will be put on hold.

To establish a three-way call in such situations, press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode and then say Join Calls.

Press and hold this button when an incoming call is received to refuse the call.

Press and hold this button during a call to end the current call. When another call is on hold or there is an incoming call, you will switch to that call.

SPEECH button Press this button to change to voice recognition mode. If you press the button briefly while in voice recognition

mode it, will interrupt prompting and allow voice com- mand input. Pressing the button longer will exit the voice recognition mode.

Pressing this button briefly during a call will enable voice recognition and allow voice command input.

1- PHONE button 2- SPEECH button 3- microphone

BK0121200US.book 93

3-94

Features and controls

3

NOTE When you press the SPEECH button to enter voice recog-

nition mode with a cellular phone paired to the system, current information on the cellular phone, such as remaining battery life, signal strength or roaming, will be displayed on the audio display.* (Refer to Pairing a cellular phone on page 3-100.) *: Some cellular phones will not send this information to the Bluetooth HFP.

Call waiting and three-way calls can be used by the Bluetooth HFP, only when those services can be used with your cellular phone.

Users may experience a delay in vehicle audio when plac- ing a call from the handset. Users may experience a delay in vehicle audio when answering an incoming call on the handset. To reduce delays users should place calls and receive calls through the Hands-free System.

Voice recognition function N00506600133

The Bluetooth HFP is equipped with a voice recognition function. Your voice will be recognized by a microphone in the overhead console, allowing you to make hands-free calls with voice commands. Voice recognition is possible in US English, North American Spanish and Canadian French. The factory setting is US English. Some of the voice commands indicated below have a number of alternative commands. For a table showing the voice com- mands in each language and the corresponding alternative commands, refer to Commands and Alternatives on page 3- 114.

NOTE If the voice command that you say differs from the pre-

defined command or cannot be recognized due to ambient noise or some other reason, the Bluetooth HFP will ask you for the voice command again up to 3 times.

For best performance and further reduction of ambient noise, the vehicle windows should be closed while engag- ing the voice recognition function.

Selecting the Language There are two ways to change the language.

NOTE The more entries that are registered in the phonebook, the

longer it will take to change the language.

BK0121200US.book 94

Features and controls

3-95

3

Change the language using the Language command 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say Setup. 3. Say Language. 4. The voice guide will say Select a language: English,

French or Spanish. Say the desired language. (Example: Say English.)

5. The voice guide will say English (Spanish or French) selected. Is this correct? Say Yes to start the language change process. Say No to return to Step 4.

6. When the voice guide says English (Spanish or French) selected, returning to main menu the language change process will be completed and the system will return to the main menu.

System recognizes the command that you said and changes the language From the main menu, say ( or ) and the Bluetooth HFP will recognize the 1 word spoken com- mand in the native language, and ask you if you want to change to that language.

1. The voice guide will say Would you like to change the language to English (Spanish or French)?

2. If you say Yes, the voice guide will say Please Wait, Switching to English (Spanish or French) Phonebook and it will start the language change process. If you do not want to change the language, say No.

3. When the voice guide says English (Spanish or French) selected, returning to main menu the language change process will be completed and the system will return to the main menu.

Speaker enrollment function N00528900080

The Bluetooth HFP can use the speaker enrollment function to create a voice model for one person per language. Your voice characteristics and pronunciations are registered in this voice model. This makes it easier for the Bluetooth HFP to recognize voice commands said by you. You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrollment function on and off whenever you want.

NOTE Phone calls received during the speaker enrollment pro-

cess cannot be answered and operations initiated by the overhead console control switch or voice recognition will not work.

BK0121200US.book 95

3-96

Features and controls

3

Speaker enrollment N00529000020

It takes a few minutes to complete the speaker enrolment pro- cess. To ensure the best results, run through the process while in the drivers seat, in an environment that is as quiet as possible (when there is no rain or strong winds and the vehicle windows are closed). Use the following procedure for speaker enrollment.

1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the selector lever in the P (PARK) position and pull the parking brake lever.

NOTE Make sure you park the vehicle in a safe area before

attempting speaker enrollment. Please turn off your phone while in speaker enrollment to

prevent interruption of the process.

2. Press the SPEECH button. 3. Say Voice training. 4. The voice guide will say This operation should only be

performed while the vehicle is parked. Please say con- tinue to perform this operation. Say Continue.

5. The voice guide will say See the owners manual for the list of required training phrases. Press and release the SPEECH button when you are ready to begin. Press and hold the SPEECH button to cancel at any time.

6. Press the SPEECH button to start the speaker enrollment process.

NOTE If you do not start the speaker enrollment process within 3

minutes of pressing the SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment function will time out. The voice guide will say Speaker Enrollment has timed out. The system will then beep and the voice recognition mode will be exited.

Phone calls received during the speaker enrollment pro- cess cannot be answered.

7. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1. Repeat the cor- responding phrase listed in table Enrollment Commands on page 3-120. The system will register your voice and then move on to the registration of the next command. Continue the pro- cess until all phrases have been registered.

NOTE If you press the SPEECH button within 5 seconds of the

reading of an enrollment phase number by the voice guide, the registration of the same phase number will be repeated. Continue the process until all phrases have been registered.

If you press and hold down the SPEECH button within 5 seconds of the reading of an enrollment phase number by the voice guide, the system will beep and stop the speaker enrollment process.

BK0121200US.book 96

Features and controls

3-97

3

8. When all enrollment commands have been read out, the voice guide will say Speaker Enrollment is complete. The system will then end the speaker enrollment process and return to the main menu.

NOTE Completing the speaker enrollment process will turn on

the voice model automatically. The commands Help and Cancel will not work in this

mode.

Enabling and disabling the voice model and retraining N00529100050

You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrollment function on and off whenever you want. You can also retrain the system. Use the following procedure to perform these actions.

1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say Voice training. 3. If you have completed a speaker enrollment process once

already, the voice guide will say either Enrollment is enabled. Would you like to disable, or retrain? or Enrollment is disabled. Would you like to enable, or retrain?

4. When enrollment is enabled, the voice model is on; when enrollment is disabled, the voice model is off. Say the command that fits your needs. Say Retrain to start the speaker enrollment process and recreate a new voice model. (Refer to Speaker enrollment on page 3-96.)

NOTE If you say Retrain you will proceed to Step 4 under

Speaker enrollment. The voice guide will say This operation should only be performed while the vehicle is parked. Please say continue to perform this operation.

BK0121200US.book 97

3-98

Features and controls

3

Help function N00506700033

The Bluetooth HFP is equipped with a Help function. If you say Help when the system is waiting for a voice com- mand input, the system will tell you a list of the commands that can be used under the circumstances.

Canceling N00506800034

There are two cancel functions. If you are at the main menu, say Cancel to exit from the Bluetooth HFP. If you are anywhere else within the system, say Cancel to return to the main menu.

MUTE function N00506900019

At any time during a call, you can mute the vehicle micro- phone. Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying Mute during a call will turn ON the MUTE function and mute the micro- phone. Saying Mute off in the same way will turn off the MUTE function and cancel the mute on the microphone.

Confirmation function setting N00507000033

The Bluetooth HFP is equipped with a confirmation function. With the confirmation function activated, you are given more opportunities than normal to confirm a command when making various settings to the Bluetooth HFP. This allows you to decrease the possibility that a setting is accidentally changed. The confirmation function can be turned on or off by following the steps below.

1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say Setup. 3. Say Confirmation prompts. 4. The voice guide will say Confirmation prompts are

. Would you like to turn confirmation prompts . Answer Yes to change the setting or answer No to keep the current setting.

5. The voice guide will say Confirmation prompts are , ready and then the system will return to the main menu.

Security function N00538900012

It is possible to use a passcode as a security function by setting a passcode of your choice for the Bluetooth HFP. When the security function is turned on, it is necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit passcode in order to use all functions of the Bluetooth HFP, except for reception.

BK0121200US.book 98

Features and controls

3-99

3

Setting the passcode N00539000010

Use the following procedure to turn on the security function by setting a passcode.

1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say Setup. 3. Say Passcode. 4. The voice guide will say Passcode is disabled. Would

you like to enable it? Answer Yes. Answer No to cancel the setting of the passcode and return to the main menu.

5. The voice guide will say Please say a 4-digit passcode. Remember this passcode. It will be required to use this system. Say 4 numbers of your choice from 0 to 9 in order to input the 4-digit passcode.

6. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say Pass- code <4-digit passcode>. Is this correct? Answer Yes. Answer No to return to the passcode input in Step 5.

7. When the registration of the passcode is completed, the voice guide will say Passcode is enabled returning to main menu, ready and the system will return to the main menu.

Entering the passcode N00539100024

If a passcode has been set and the security function is enabled, the voice guide will say Hands-free System is locked. State the passcode to continue when the SPEECH button is pressed to enter voice recognition mode. Say the 4-digit passcode num- ber to enter the passcode.

If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice guide will say <4- digit passcode>, Incorrect Passcode. Please try again. Enter the correct passcode.

NOTE You can reenter the passcode as many times as you want. If you have forgotten your passcode, say Cancel to quit

the voice input mode and then check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Disabling the passcode N00539200012

Use the following procedure to turn off the security function by disabling the passcode.

1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say Setup. 3. Say Passcode. 4. The voice guide will say Passcode is enabled. Would you

like to disable it? Answer Yes. Answer No to cancel the disabling of the passcode and return to the main menu.

5. When the disabling of the passcode is completed, the voice guide will say Passcode is disabled returning to main menu, ready and the system will return to the main menu.

BK0121200US.book 99

3-100

Features and controls

3

Pairing a cellular phone N00507100164

To use the Bluetooth HFP, you need to pair a Bluetooth

compatible cellular phone to the Bluetooth HFP. The Bluetooth HFP can register up to a maximum of 7 Bluetooth compatible cellular phones. However, of the cellu- lar phones registered, the cellular phone with the highest prior- ity level will be automatically paired to the Bluetooth HFP.

NOTE Some Bluetooth compatible cellular phones may not be

compatible with the Bluetooth HFP. You can determine what types of Bluetooth cellular phones with Hands-Free Profile can be used by checking the following website for the Bluetooth HFP. www.mitsubishicars.com/owners

Use the following procedure to pair a Bluetooth compatible cellular phone to the Bluetooth HFP.

1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the selector lever in the P (PARK) position and pull the parking brake lever.

NOTE Make sure you park the vehicle in a safe area before pair-

ing a cellular phone to the system.

2. Press the SPEECH button. 3. Say Setup. 4. Say Pairing Options. 5. The voice guide will say Do you want to Pair a phone,

delete a phone or list paired phones? Say Pair a phone.

NOTE A maximum of 7 Bluetooth compatible cellular phones

can be registered. If 7 cellular phones are already registered, delete a phone and then pair the new phone. (Refer to Deleting a phone on page 3-103.)

6. The voice guide will say This operation should only be performed while the vehicle is parked. Please say con- tinue to perform this operation. Say Continue.

BK0121200US.book 100

Features and controls

3-101

3

7. After the voice guide says Please say a 4-digit pairing code, say a 4-digit code. The 4-digit code will be regis- tered as a pairing code for the phone. When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm whether the code said is acceptable. To continue with the code, answer Yes. Say No to return to pairing code selection.

NOTE The pairing code entered here is only used for the

Bluetooth connection certification. It is any 4-digit code the user would like to select. Remember the pairing code as it needs to be keyed into the phone later in the pairing process. Depending on the Bluetooth connection settings selected, entry of this code may be required each time the phone attempts to connect to the Bluetooth HFP. Refer to your cellular phone owners manual for connection defaults and settings.

8. The voice guide will say Start pairing procedure on phone. See phones manual for instructions. Refer to the owners manual for your cellular phone and enter into the phone the pairing code that was registered in Step 7.

9. When the system finds a Bluetooth compatible cellular phone, the voice guide will say Please say the name of the phone after the beep. After you hear the beep, name the phone by saying a name of your preference. When the confirmation function is on, the system will say Adding , is this correct? Answer Yes to accept that name or No to reenter a new name.

NOTE When the system cannot recognize the Bluetooth com-

patible cellular phone, the pairing process will end and the system will beep and then return to normal status. Try the pairing process again after reconfirming whether or not the Bluetooth HFP supports your Bluetooth

compatible cellular phone.

10. The voice guide will say Assign a priority for this phone between 1 and 7 where 1 is the phone used most often. Say a number between 1 and 7 to set a priority level for the cellular phone.

NOTE If you selected a priority level that has already been set for

a different phone, the system will ask you whether you wish to override that priority level. To override the priority level, answer Yes. Answer No to return to the priority level selection in Step 10.

BK0121200US.book 101

3-102

Features and controls

3

11. After the voice guide says set to priority , the system will start the pairing process. Wait a moment for the pairing process to complete. When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm the assigned phone name and priority again. Answer Yes. Answer No to return to the priority level selection in Step 10.

12. When the pairing process is completed, the voice guide will say Pairing Complete. The system will then beep and the voice recognition mode will be exited.

NOTE If you are having difficulty pairing the phone, assistance

can be obtained by calling Mitsubishi hands free con- sumer support line 1-888-702-4100.

Selecting the phone N00507200035

When multiple paired phones are present in range of the Bluetooth HFP, the phone with the highest priority (set during the paring process) will be connected to the system. Use the following procedure to connect to another paired phone with lower priority.

1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say Setup. 3. Say Select phone.

4. After the voice guide says Please say, it will read out each priority number and phone name pair in order, start- ing with the phone that has the highest priority level (from 1 to 7). Say the priority number of the phone that you want to con- nect to.

NOTE You can connect to a phone at any time by pressing the

SPEECH button and saying the priority number, even before all of the priority number and phone name pairs are read out by the system.

5. After the voice guide says selected, the system will reconnect to the cellular phone. Wait a moment for the process to complete. When the confirmation prompts are on, the system will ask you again whether the phone that you want to recon- nect to is correct. Answer Yes to continue and reconnect to the cellular phone. If you answer No, the system will ask Which phone please? Select the priority of the phone that you want to connect to.

6. When the reconnection of the cellular phone is completed, the voice guide will say will temporarily override phone priorities and then the system will return to the main menu.

NOTE To change the priority level of a specific phone, redo the

pairing process for that phone. (Refer to Pairing a cellu- lar phone on page 3-100.)

BK0121200US.book 102

Features and controls

3-103

3

Having the system tell you a list of the registered cellular phones

N00507300052

You can use the following procedure to hear a list of the cellu- lar phones that are currently registered.

1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say Setup. 3. Say Pairing Options. 4. The voice guide will say Do you want to Pair a phone,

delete a phone or list paired phones? Say list paired phones.

5. The Bluetooth HFP will read out the paired phones in order, starting with the phone with the highest priority level.

6. When the voice guide is done reading all phone names, it will say End of List, would you like to start from the beginning? To hear the list again from the beginning, answer Yes. When you are done, answer No to return to the main menu.

NOTE If you press and release the SPEECH button and say

Continue or Previous while the list is being read, the system will advance or rewind the list. Say Continue to proceed to the phone with the next highest priority level or Previous to return to the phone with the previous prior- ity level.

Deleting a phone N00507400053

Use the following procedure to delete a paired Bluetooth

compatible cellular phone from the Bluetooth HFP. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say Setup. 3. Say Pairing Options. 4. The voice guide will say Do you want to Pair a phone,

delete a phone or list paired phones? Say Delete a phone.

5. After the voice guide says Please say, it will read out each priority number and phone name pair in order, start- ing with the phone that has the highest priority level (from 1 to 7). After it completes reading all pairs, the voice guide will say or all or say cancel to return to main menu. Say the priority number of the phone that you want to delete from the system. Say All to delete all paired phones from the system, or Cancel to end the deletion process and return to the main menu.

6. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say Removing (all) is this correct? Answer Yes to delete the phone(s). If you answer No, the voice guide will ask Which phone please? Say again the priority number of the phone that you want to delete from the system.

BK0121200US.book 103

3-104

Features and controls

3

7. When the phone deletion process is completed, the voice guide will say Deleted. The system will then beep and the voice recognition mode will be exited. If the phone deletion process fails for some reason, the voice guide will say Delete failed. The system will then beep and the voice recognition mode will be exited. Start over again from Step 1.

To make a call N00507500038

To use the Bluetooth HFP to make a call, a Bluetooth cellu- lar phones with Hands-free Profile must be paired to the sys- tem. If a cellular phone has not been paired to the system, do so in accordance with the instructions provided in Pairing a cel- lular phone on page 3-100.

Making a call by using the telephone number N00507600101

You can make a call by saying the telephone number. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say Dial. 3. After the voice guide says Number Please, say the tele-

phone number. The Bluetooth HFP will then make the call. When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm the telephone number again. To continue with that number, answer Yes. To change the telephone number, answer No and then say the telephone number again.

NOTE In the case of English, the system will recognize both

zero and oh (Letter o) for the number 0. Refer to Commands and Alternatives on page 3-114 for details.

Making a call by saying a name in the system phonebook

N00507700056

You can make a call by saying a name that has been registered in the phonebook for the Bluetooth HFP. For more information on the phonebook, refer to Phonebook function on page 3-106.

1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say Call. 3. After the voice guide says Name Please, say the name

of the person that you want to call that is registered in the phonebook.

4. If multiple telephone numbers are registered for the per- son, the voice guide will ask Would you like to call at {home}, {work}, {mobile} or {pager}? Say the location of the number that you want to call.

NOTE If a telephone number is not registered for the selected

location, the voice guide will say {home/work/mobile/pager} not found for . Would you like to add location or try again, or say can- cel to return to main menu. Say Try again to redo the phone call, Add location to add a new location to the telephone book, or Cancel to hang up the phone.

BK0121200US.book 104

Features and controls

3-105

3

5. After the voice guide says Calling at , the Bluetooth HFP will make the call. When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm whether or not the name of the recipient of the call is correct. Answer Yes to use that name. If you want to change the name or location to call, answer No. The system will return to Step 3.

Redialing N00507800015

You can redial the last number called, based on the history of dialed calls in the paired cellular phone. Use the following procedure to redial.

1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say Redial.

SEND function N00508000027

During a call, press the SPEECH button to enter the voice rec- ognition mode and then say {number string} SEND to gener- ate a DTMF tone. For example, if during a call you need to simulate the press of a phone button as a response to an automated system, press the SPEECH button and speak 1 2 3 4 pound SEND and the 1234# will be sent on your cellular phone.

BK0121200US.book 105

3-106

Features and controls

3

Switching between hands-free mode and private mode

N00508100031

The Bluetooth HFP can switch between Hands-free mode (Hands-free calls) and private mode (calls using cellular phone). If you press the SPEECH button and say Transfer call during a Hands-free call, you can stop the Hands-free mode and talk in private mode on your cellular phone. To return to Hands-free mode, press the SPEECH button again and say Transfer call.

Receiving calls N00508200032

If an incoming phone call is received while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the audio system will be automatically turned on and Incoming Call will be played, even when the audio system was originally off. The voice guide announcement for the incoming call will be output from the front passengers seat speaker. If the CD player or radio was playing when the incoming call was received, the audio system will mute the sound from the CD player or radio and output only the Incoming Call. To receive the call, press the PHONE button on the overhead console control switch. When the call is over, the audio system will return to its previ- ous state.

Phonebook function N00508300020

The Bluetooth HFP has its own phonebook separate from the phonebook on the cellular phone. This phonebook is used when making calls with the voice rec- ognition function. You can register up to 32 names for each language in the phonebook. Also, each entry has 4 locations associated with: HOME, WORK, MOBILE and PAGER. You can register one telephone number for each location. The phonebook main menu is used to register or edit informa- tion in the phonebook. Use the following procedure to call up the phonebook main menu.

1. Press the SPEECH button. 2. Say Phonebook. 3. The voice guide will say Select one of the following:

new entry, edit, list names, delete or erase all, or say can- cel to return to main menu and will wait for your com- mand.

NOTE Disconnecting the battery cable will not delete informa-

tion registered in the phonebook.

BK0121200US.book 106

Features and controls

3-107

3

New entry N00508400050

You can register a new entry in the phonebook by saying New entry on the phonebook main menu. You can register up to a maximum of 32 entries. Use the following procedure to regis- ter a new entry.

1. If you have not reached the limit yet, the voice guide will say Name Please. Say your preferred name to register it.

NOTE If you have reached the limit, the voice guide will say

Phonebook full. Do you want to delete a name or say Cancel to return to main menu. Say Delete to delete an entry or Cancel to return to the main menu.

2. When the name has been registered, the voice guide will say HOME, WORK, MOBILE, OR PAGER? Say the location for which you want to register a number.

NOTE When the confirmation function is on, the system will

confirm the location again. To continue with the current location, answer Yes. Answer No to return to location selection in Step 2. If a telephone number has been registered for the selected location, the voice guide will say The current number is , number please. If you do not want to change the telephone number, say the original number to keep it registered.

3. Say the telephone number to register it.

NOTE In the case of English, the system will recognize both

zero and oh (Letter o) for the number 0. Refer to Commands and Alternatives on page 3-114 for details.

When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm the telephone number again. To continue with the current telephone number, answer Yes. Say No to return to telephone number registration in Step 3.

4. When the telephone number has been registered, the voice guide will say Number saved. Would you like to add another number for this entry? To add another telephone number for a new location for the current entry, answer Yes. The system will return to location selection in Step 2. Answer No to end the registration process and return to the main menu.

BK0121200US.book 107

3-108

Features and controls

3

Edit N00508500035

You can edit information in the phonebook by saying Edit on the phonebook main menu.

1. The voice guide will say Please say the name of the entry you would like to edit, or say list names, or say cancel to return to main menu. Say the name of the entry that you want to edit.

NOTE If the name that you said is not in the phonebook, the

voice guide will say Pardon, please say the name of the entry you would like to edit, or say list names, or say cancel to return to main menu. Say Try again to try again or Cancel to end the edit process and return to the main menu.

If you say List Names, the system will read out each name registered in the phonebook in order. Refer to Hav- ing the system tell you a list of the phonebook entries on page 3-109.

2. The voice guide will say Home, Work, Mobile or Pager? Select the location for which you want to change the telephone number.

NOTE When the confirmation function is on, the system will

confirm again the name and location to edit. To continue with that information, answer Yes. Answer No to return to Step 1.

3. After the voice guide says Number Please, say the tele- phone number to register it. If a telephone number has been registered for the selected location, the voice guide will say The current number is . New number, please. Say a new tele- phone number to change the number.

NOTE When the confirmation function is on, the system will

confirm again the telephone number. To continue with that number, answer Yes. To change the telephone number, answer No and then say the telephone number again.

4. When the telephone number change process is done, the voice guide will say Number changed. Would you like to call this number, edit another entry, or say cancel to return to main menu? Say Call to immediately call the number, Edit to edit another number, or Cancel to end the edit process and return to the main menu.

BK0121200US.book 108

Features and controls

3-109

3

Having the system tell you a list of the phonebook entries

N00508600052

You can hear a list of the names registered in the phonebook by saying List names on the phonebook main menu.

1. The Bluetooth HFP will read out the entries in the phonebook in order.

2. When the voice guide is done reading the list, it will say End of list, would you like to start from the beginning? When you want to check the list again from the beginning, answer Yes. When you are done, answer No to return to the main menu.

NOTE You can call, edit or delete a name that is being read out.

Press the SPEECH button and say Call to call the name, Edit to edit it, or Delete to delete it. The system will beep and then execute your command.

If you press and release the SPEECH button and say Continue or Previous while the list is being read, the system will advance or rewind the list. Say Continue to proceed to the next entry or Previous to return to the previous entry.

Deleting a registered number N00511700057

You can delete a telephone number in the phonebook by saying Delete on the phonebook main menu.

1. The voice guide will say Please say the name of the entry you would like to delete, or say list names, or say can- cel to return to main menu. Say the name of the entry that you want to delete.

NOTE If the name that you said is not in the phonebook, the

voice guide will say Name not found. Would you like to try again or say Cancel to return to main menu? Say Try again to try again or Cancel to end the dele- tion process and return to the main menu.

If you say List Names, the system will read out each entry registered in the phonebook in order. Refer to Hav- ing the system tell you a list of the phonebook entries on page 3-109.

2. If there are telephone numbers registered for multiple locations for the selected name, the voice guide will say Would you like to delete [Home,] [Work,] [Mobile,] [Pager,] or all. Select the location that has the telephone number that you want to delete. Say All if you want to delete the telephone numbers for all locations.

3. The system will confirm whether it is ok to delete the tele- phone number of the selected location. Answer Yes to delete the number. Answer No to cancel the deletion process and return to Step 1.

BK0121200US.book 109

3-110

Features and controls

3

4. When the deletion of the telephone number is completed, the voice guide will say deleted and then the system will return to the main menu.

NOTE If you delete all telephone numbers registered for the 4

locations of an entry, the entry itself will be deleted from the phonebook.

Erasing the Phonebook N00511800045

You can delete all registered information in the phonebook by saying Erase all on the phonebook main menu.

1. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will ask Are you sure you want to erase everything from your Hands- free system phonebook? Answer Yes. Answer No to cancel the deletion of all registered infor- mation in the phonebook and return to the main menu.

2. The system will confirm one more time. Answer Yes to continue. Answer No to cancel the deletion of all registered infor- mation in the phonebook and return to the main menu.

3. When the deletion of all information in the phonebook is completed, the voice guide will say Hands-free system Phonebook Erased and then return to the main menu.

General information N00511900046

MODEL: MMC FCC ID: CB2MBLUEC07 IC: 279B- MBLUEC07 Your Hands-free Bluetooth cellular phone interface system with voice recognition operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.

This device may not cause interference. This device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

The term IC: before the radio certification number only sig- nifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance.

CAUTION! Changes or modifications not expressly approved by

the manufacturer for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

BK0121200US.book 110

Features and controls

3-111

3

Voice Command Tree N00512000086

BK0121200US.book 111

3-112

Features and controls

3

Voice Command Tree - Phonebook N00512100045

BK0121200US.book 112

Features and controls

3-113

3

Voice Command Tree - Setup N00512800039

BK0121200US.book 113

3-114

Features and controls

3

Commands and Alternatives N00513300073

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands

SETUP English Setup - Spanish Configuracin - French Configurer -

PHONE- BOOK

English Phonebook - Spanish Agenda - French Rpertoire -

DIAL English Dial - Spanish Marcar - French Composer -

CALL English Call - Spanish Llamar - French Appeler -

REDIAL English Redial - Spanish Volver A Marcar - French Recomposer -

PAIRING OPTIONS

English Pairing Options Pairing

Spanish Opciones De Empa- rejamiento Emparejamiento

French Options De Jume- lage Jumelage

PAIR English Pair - Spanish Emparejar - French Jumeler -

DELETE A PHONE

English Delete A Phone Delete

Spanish Eliminar Un Tel- fono Eliminar

French Supprimer Un Tl- phone Supprimer

LIST

English List List Phones Spanish Listar Listar Telfonos

French Lister Liste Des Tl- phones

SELECT PHONE

English Select Phone -

Spanish Seleccionar Tel- fono -

French Slectionner Un Tlphone -

PREVIOUS English Previous - Spanish Anterior - French Prcdent -

TRANS- FER CALL

English Transfer Call - Spanish Transferir Llamada - French Transfrer Lappel -

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands

BK0121200US.book 114

Features and controls

3-115

3

ADD LOCATION

English Add Location -

Spanish Agregar {Una} Ubicacin -

French Ajouter {Un} Emplacement -

CONFIR- MATION PROMPTS

English Confirmation Prompts

Confirmations, Prompts

Spanish Mensajes De Con- firmacin

Confirmaciones, Mensajes

French Invites De Confir- mation

Confirmations, Invites

LAN- GUAGE

English Language - Spanish Idioma - French Langue -

NEW ENTRY

English New Entry - Spanish Nueva Entrada -

French Nouvelle Inscrip- tion -

DELETE English Delete - Spanish Eliminar - French Supprimer -

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands

EDIT English Edit - Spanish Editar - French Modifier -

CALL THIS NUMBER

English Call This Number Call

Spanish Llamar A Este Nmero Llamar

French Appeler Ce Numro Appeler

EDIT ANO- THER ENTRY

English Edit Another Entry Edit Spanish Editar Otra Entrada Editar

French Modifier Une Autre Inscription Modifier

TRY AGAIN

English Try Again - Spanish Intentarlo De Nuevo - French Ressayer -

ERASE ALL

English Erase All - Spanish Borrar Todo - French Effacer Tout -

LIST NAMES

English List Names - Spanish Listar Nombres - French Liste Des Noms -

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands

BK0121200US.book 115

3-116

Features and controls

3

HOME English Home - Spanish Casa En Su Casa French Maison La Maison

WORK English Work - Spanish Trabajo En Su Trabajo French Travail Au Travail

MOBILE English Mobile - Spanish Celular En Su Celular French Mobile Sur Le Mobile

PAGER

English Pager - Spanish Pager Al Pager

French Tlavertisseur Sur Le Tlaver- tisseur

HELP English Help - Spanish Ayuda - French Aide -

CONTI- NUE

English Continue - Spanish Continuar - French Continuer -

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands

ALL English All - Spanish Todos - French Tous -

CANCEL English Cancel - Spanish Cancelar - French Annuler -

MUTE English Mute - Spanish Silencio - French Sourdine -

MUTE OFF

English Mute Off -

Spanish Silencio Desacti- vado -

French Dsactiver La Sour- dine -

SEND English Send - Spanish Enviar - French Envoyer -

YES English Yes - Spanish S - French Oui -

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands

BK0121200US.book 116

Features and controls

3-117

3

NO English No - Spanish No - French Non -

ZERO English Zero Oh (letter O ) Spanish Cero O French Zro O (lettre o)

ONE English One - Spanish Uno Una French Un Une

TWO English Two - Spanish Dos - French Deux -

THREE English Three - Spanish Tres - French Trois -

FOUR English Four - Spanish Cuatro - French Quatre -

FIVE English Five - Spanish Cinco - French Cinq -

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands

SIX English Six - Spanish Seis - French Six -

SEVEN English Seven - Spanish Siete - French Sept -

EIGHT English Eight - Spanish Ocho - French Huit -

NINE English Nine - Spanish Nueve - French Neuf -

STAR English Star (*) - Spanish Estrella (*) Asterisco (*) French toile (*) -

POUND

English Pound (#) -

Spanish Nmero (#) Signo De Nmero (#)

French Dise (#) -

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands

BK0121200US.book 117

3-118

Features and controls

3

Spoken Language

English English - Spanish Espaol - French Franais -

PHONE- BOOK NEW ENTRY

English Phonebook New Entry -

Spanish Agenda - Nueva Entrada -

French Rpertoire Nou- velle Inscription -

PHONE- BOOK EDIT

English Phonebook Edit - Spanish Agenda - Editar - French Rpertoire Modifier -

PHONE- BOOK DELETE

English Phonebook Delete - Spanish Agenda - Eliminar -

French Rpertoire Suppri- mer -

PHONE- BOOK ERASE ALL

English Phonebook Erase All -

Spanish Agenda - Borrar Todo -

French Rpertoire Effacer Tout -

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands

PHONE- BOOK LIST NAMES

English Phonebook List Names -

Spanish Agenda - Listar Nombres -

French Rpertoire Liste Des Noms -

SETUP CONFIR- MATION PROMPTS

English Setup Confirmation Prompts

Setup Confirma- tions, Setup Prompts

Spanish Configuracin Men- sajes De Confirma- cin

Configuracin Confirmaciones, Configuracin Mensajes

French Configurer Les Invites De Confir- mation

Configurer la Confirmation, Configurer les Invites

SETUP SELECT PHONE

English Setup Select Phone Setup Select

Spanish Configuracin Seleccin De Tel- fono

Configuracin Seleccin

French Configurer Slec- tionner Un Tl- phone

Configurer Slec- tionner

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands

BK0121200US.book 118

Features and controls

3-119

3

SETUP PAIRING OPTIONS

English Setup Pairing Options Setup Pairing

Spanish Configuracin Opciones De Empa- rejamiento

-

French Configurer Les Options De Jume- lage

Configurer le Jumelage

DELETE A NAME

English Delete A Name Delete, Delete Name

Spanish Eliminar Un Nom- bre

Eliminar, Elimi- nar Nombre

French Supprimer Un Nom Supprimer, Sup- primer Nom

SETUP LAN- GUAGE

English Setup Language -

Spanish Configuracin Idioma -

French Configurer La Lan- gue -

VOICE TRAINING

English Voice Training - Spanish Aprendizaje De Voz -

French Entranement La Parole -

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands

PASSCODE English Passcode - Spanish Contrasea - French NIP -

SETUP PASSCODE

English Setup Passcode -

Spanish Configuracin Con- trasea -

French Configurer Le NIP -

RETRAIN

English Retrain - Spanish Volver A Educar -

French Refaire Lentrane- ment -

ENABLE English Enable - Spanish Activar - French Activer Lactiver

DISABLE English Disable - Spanish Desactivar - French Dsactiver -

SWAP CALLS

English Swap Calls -

Spanish Intercambiar llama- das -

French Passer lautre appel -

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands

BK0121200US.book 119

3-120

Features and controls

3

Enrollment Commands N00539500057

JOIN CALLS

English Join Calls - Spanish Unir Llamadas - French Intgrer Lappel -

ENGLISH English English - Spanish Ingls - French Anglais langlais

SPANISH English Spanish - Spanish Espaol - French Espagnol lespagnol

FRENCH English French - Spanish Francs - French Franais -

Phrase # English Spanish French 1 01-23456789 01-23456789 01-23456789 2 888-555-1212 888-555-1212 888-555-1212 3 Call Llamar Appeler 4 Dial Marcar Composer 5 Setup Configuracin Configurer 6 Cancel Cancelar Annuler

Command Lan- guage Primary Command Alternative

Commands 7 Continue Continuar Continuer 8 Help Ayude Aide

Phrase # English Spanish French

BK0121200US.book 120

Features and controls

3-121

3

Sun visors N00524600063

Fold the sun visor downward (1) to reduce front glare while driving. To reduce side glare, turn the visor to the side (2).

Slide plate To block out additional side glare, swing the sun visor side- ways and pull out the slide plate (A).

BK0121200US.book 121

3-122

Features and controls

3

Vanity mirror N00524700211

The vanity mirror is located on the back of the sun visor. If your vehicle is equipped with mirror lights, opening the lid (A) of the vanity mirror will automatically turn on the mirror lights (B).

Power outlet N00525000442

To use a plug-in type accessory, open the cover located in front of the floor console, then insert the plug in the socket. The accessory can be operated when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.

CAUTION! If the lid of the lighted vanity mirror is kept open for

prolonged periods of time, the battery may be dis- charged.

CAUTION! Be aware that using electronic equipment with the

engine off may run the battery down. Be sure to use a plug-in type accessory operating

at 12 V and 120 W or less. When the power outlet is not in use, be sure to close

the power outlet cover. This will prevent the power outlet from becoming dirty and possibly short-cir- cuiting.

BK0121200US.book 122

Features and controls

3-123

3

Digital clock (if so equipped) N00525100209

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the time is displayed.

How each button works: Set the time by pressing the various buttons as described below.

NOTE If the battery cables are disconnected or the battery

becomes discharged, the clock will have to be reset.

H (HOUR)- Press and hold the H button until the correct hour appears.

M (MINUTE)- Press and hold the M button until the correct minute appears.

BK0121200US.book 123

3-124

Features and controls

3

HomeLink Wireless Control System (if so equipped)

N00554300027

HomeLink Wireless Control System is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc.. HomeLink provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. HomeLink will operate most radio frequency devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.

NOTE Your vehicles engine should be turned off while program-

ming HomeLink.

HomeLink is powered by your vehicles battery. No sep- arate batteries are required. If the vehicles battery is dis- charged or is disconnected, HomeLink will retain all programming.

Once HomeLink is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (for exam- ple, new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons should be erased for security purposes.

WARNING! Do not use HomeLink with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. Federal Regulations. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current U.S. Federal Regulations. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

During programming, your garage door or gate may open or close. Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that you are pro- gramming.

BK0121200US.book 124

Features and controls

3-125

3

Programming HomeLink To program HomeLink to operate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener, home or office lighting, you need to be at the same location as the device.

NOTE Some garage door openers manufactured after 1996 have

rolling code protection. To program a garage door opener equipped with rolling code protection; you will need to access the garage door opener motor to press the motors learn buttons. For convenience, use a ladder and another person to assist you.

1. Unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

2. Press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink buttons (A) (to clear the memory) until the indicator light (B) blinks slowly (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.

3. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (25 to 75 mm) away from HomeLink surface.

4. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold both HomeLink button (C) you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button (D). Do not release the but- tons until step 5 has been completed.

5. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on HomeLink flashes, changing from a slow blink to a rapidly flashing blink. This could take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming. Press and hold Homelink button and observe the indicator light.

BK0121200US.book 125

3-126

Features and controls

3

6. If the indicator light on HomeLink blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid, HomeLink has picked up a rolling code garage door opener signal. Now continue with the next steps to train HomeLink to complete the programming.

7. Press and release the smart or learn program button located on the garage door openers motor to activate the training mode. This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor. If the wire originates from under a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the program button.

NOTE Once you have pressed and released the program button

on the garage door openers motor and the training light is on, you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 8. Use the help of a second person for convenience to assist when performing this step.

8. Quickly within 30 seconds of pressing and releasing the garage door opener program button, firmly press and release HomeLink button youve just programmed. Press and release HomeLink button up to three times to complete the training.

9. To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for addi- tional door or gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.

NOTE Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to clear all previ-

ously programmed HomeLink buttons. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, please refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

Programming HomeLink for Canadian cus- tomers Prior to 1992, D.O.C regulations required hand-held transmit- ters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter to HomeLink, continue to press and hold HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4 under Pro- gramming HomeLink) while you press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful program- ming).

Operating HomeLink To operate, simply press the appropriate programmed HomeLink button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

Programming trouble diagnosis If HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

Replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new bat- teries.

Position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from HomeLink surface.

Press and hold both HomeLink and hand-held transmit- ter buttons without interruption.

Position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 126 mm) away from HomeLink surface. Hold the transmit- ter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding the trans- mitter in another position with the indicator light in view at all times.

BK0121200US.book 126

Features and controls

3-127

3

If you continue to have programming difficulties, please con- tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Clearing the programmed information To clear all programming, press and hold the two outside but- tons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds) individual buttons cannot be cleared.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To reprogram a HomeLink button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from HomeLink surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 4. HomeLink indicator light will flash, first slowly and

then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rap- idly, release both buttons.

The new device can be activated by pushing HomeLink but- ton that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons.

If your vehicle is stolen If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink. Consult the Owners Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram HomeLink with your new transmitter information.

General information Your HomeLink system operates on a radio frequency sub- ject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS- 210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.

This device may not cause interference. This device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION! Changes or modifications not expressly approved by

the manufacturer for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

BK0121200US.book 127

3-128

Features and controls

3

Interior lights N00525300445

Reading lights N00525700175

Push the reading light switch (A) to turn on the light. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map light.

Push the reading light switch again to turn the light off. The reading light comes on when any door is opened. When all the doors are closed, the reading light is dimmed gradually for 30 seconds then goes off. However, the light goes off immediately without being dimmed if:

The ignition switch is turned to the ON position. All the doors are locked using the power door lock switch,

or the keyless entry remote transmitter.

Reading lights P.3-128

Dome light P.3-129

BK0121200US.book 128

Features and controls

3-129

3

NOTE If the ignition key is removed with the doors closed, the

interior lights come on for 30 seconds, then go off. The time until the light goes off can be adjusted. See your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- nication System, adjustments can be made using screen operations. For details, refer to the separate owners man- ual.

Dome light N00525400374

The dome light can be operated by pushing the rear side of the light.

The dome light comes on when any door is opened. When all the doors are closed, the dome light is dimmed gradu- ally for 30 seconds then goes off. However, the light goes off immediately without being dimmed if:

The ignition switch is turned to the ON position. All the doors are locked using the power door lock switch,

or the keyless entry remote transmitter.

BK0121200US.book 129

3-130

Features and controls

3

NOTE If the ignition key is removed with the doors closed, the

interior lights come on for 30 seconds, then go off. The time until the light goes off can be adjusted. See your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- nication System, adjustments can be made using screen operations. For details, refer to the separate owners man- ual.

Interior light auto-cutout function (dome light and reading light)

N00526300413

If any of the interior lights are left on with the ignition switch in the LOCK position, the lights go off automatically after about 30 minutes. The lights come on again if the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position, any door is opened and closed or the keyless entry system is operated.

NOTE The interior light auto-cutout function can be deactivated.

The time until the lights automatically go off can be adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- nication System, adjustments can be made using screen operations. For details, refer to the separate owners man- ual.

BK0121200US.book 130

Features and controls

3-131

3

Accessory boxes N00526400443

Convenient storage space is located throughout the vehicle.

Glove compartment N00526500242

To open, pull the lever (A).

NOTE When the light switch is set in either the or

position, the glove compartment light illuminates. (If so equipped)

1- Glove compartment 2- Floor console box/Tissue holder/Pen holders

WARNING! An open glove compartment door can cause a seri-

ous injury to the front passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always keep the glove compartment door closed when driving.

BK0121200US.book 131

3-132

Features and controls

3

Floor console box/Tissue holder/Pen hold- ers

N00526600168

Floor console box The floor console box is located under the arm rest. To open the console box, lift the lever (A) and raise the arm rest (B).

Tissue holder/Pen holder The tissue holder (A) and pen holders (B) are located on the back of the arm rest.

BK0121200US.book 132

Features and controls

3-133

3

Cup holder N00527300263

For the front seat The cup holder is located in the middle of the floor console. The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink-cans securely in its holes.

For the rear seat N00537000032

This cup holder is located in the rear seat arm rest (A). Pull the rear arm rest down to use the cup holder.

CAUTION! Do not drink beverages while driving your vehicle.

This is distracting and could cause an accident.

BK0121200US.book 133

3-134

Features and controls

3

Luggage hooks N00528500220

There are four hooks on the side of the trunk for use in securing luggage.

NOTE Do not hang heavy luggage {more than about 6.6 pound

(3 kg)} on the hook. Doing so could damage the hook.

Coat hook N00553600036

There is a hook on the rear drivers side assist grip for use in hanging clothes.

WARNING! Do not put a hanger or any heavy or pointed object

on the coat hook. If the curtain air bag was acti- vated, any such item could be propelled away with great force and could prevent the curtain air bag from inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly on the coat hook (without using a hanger). Make sure there are no heavy or sharp objects in the pockets of clothes that you hang on the coat hook.

BK0121200US.book 134

4

Driving safety

Fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 2 Driving, alcohol and drugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 2 Vehicle preparation before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 3 Safe driving techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 5 Driving during cold weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 5 Braking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 6 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 7 Loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 8 Cargo loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 12 Trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 13

BK0121200US.book 1

4-2

Driving safety

4

Fuel economy N00628800080

Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Your personal driving habits can have a significant effect on your fuel use. Several recommendations for achieving the greatest fuel econ- omy are listed below.

Whenever accelerating from a stop, always accelerate slowly and smoothly.

When parked for even a short period, do not idle the engine. Shut it off.

Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary stops. Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures. For freeway driving, maintain a speed of approximately

50 mph (80 km/h) when traffic, roadway and weather con- ditions safely permit.

Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle lubricated according to the recommendations in this manual.

Always keep your vehicle well maintained. A poorly maintained engine wastes fuel and costs money.

Do not overload your vehicle.

Driving, alcohol and drugs N00628900010

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired even with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you have been drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use public transportation. Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will not make you sober. Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs affect your alertness, perception and reaction time. Consult with your doc- tor or pharmacist before driving while under the influence of any of these medications.

WARNING! NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.

Your perceptions are less accurate, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired.

BK0121200US.book 2

Driving safety

4-3

4

Vehicle preparation before driving N00629000597

For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always observe the follow- ing:

Seat belts and seats Before starting the vehicle, make certain that you and all

passengers are seated and wearing their seat belts properly (with children in the rear seat, in appropriate restraints), and that all the doors are locked.

Move the drivers seat as far backward as possible, while still keeping good visibility, and good control of the steer- ing wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check the instrument panel indicators for any possible problem.

Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. Make sure that infants and small children are properly

restrained in accordance with all laws and regulations.

Floor mat Always properly position floor mat and assure it does not inter- fere with operation of the pedals. Always use retaining clip on the drivers floorboard to secure the Mitsubishi genuine floor mat. When used, this clip will help prevent the floor mat from moving forward and possibly interfering with the operation of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat from moving forward and possibly interfering with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi genuine floor mats are recommended.

WARNING! Always properly position floor mat and assure it

does not interfere with operation of the pedals. Always use retaining clip on the drivers floorboard

to secure the Mitsubishi genuine floor mat. Always install the mat with the correct side facing

down. Never install a second mat over an existing floor

mat.

BK0121200US.book 3

4-4

Driving safety

4 Defrosters Check these by selecting the defroster mode, and set the blower switch on high. You should be able to feel the air blowing against the windshield. (Refer to Defrosting or defogging the windshield and door windows on page 5-12, 5-19.)

Tires Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or uneven wear pat- terns. Look for stones, nails, glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires (including spare tire) for proper pressures. Replace your tires before they are heavily worn out. As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, there is a risk of damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire replacement should, therefore, be performed only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Lights Have someone watch while you turn all the exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn signal indicators and high-beam indicators on the instrument panel.

Fluid leaks Check the ground under the vehicle after parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need to find out why immediately and have it fixed.

BK0121200US.book 4

Driving safety

4-5

4

Safe driving techniques N00629200052

Even this vehicles safety equipment, and your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you can avoid an accident or injury. However, if you give extra attention to the following areas, you can better protect yourself and your passengers:

Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, road and weather conditions. Leave plenty of stopping distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors and use your turn-signal light.

While driving, watch the behavior of other drivers, bicy- clists, and pedestrians.

Always obey applicable laws and regulations. Be a polite and alert driver. Always leave room for unexpected events, such as sudden braking.

If you plan to drive in another country, obey their vehicle registration laws and make sure you will be able to get the right fuel.

Driving during cold weather N00629400272

Check the battery, including terminals and cables. During extremely cold weather, the battery will not be as strong. Also, the battery power level may drop because more power is used for cold starting and driving. Before driving the vehicle, check to see if the engine runs at the proper speed and if the headlights are as bright as normally. Charge or replace the battery if necessary. Dur- ing extreme cold weather, it is possible that a very low battery could freeze.

Warm the engine sufficiently. After starting the engine, allow a short warm-up time to distribute oil to all cylin- ders. Then drive your vehicle slowly. Stay at low speeds at first so that the transaxle fluid has time to spread to all the lubrication points.

WARNING! The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas. Any

spark or flame can cause the battery to explode, which could cause serious injury or death. Always wear protective clothes and a face mask when working with your battery, or let a skilled mechanic do it.

BK0121200US.book 5

4-6

Driving safety

4

Check the engine antifreeze. If there is not enough coolant because of a leak or from engine overheating, add high-quality ethylene glycol anti- freeze and water. The recommended blend is about 50 % water and 50 % anti-freeze. Use a higher concentration (not over 60 %) when the outside temperature is -31 F (-35 C) or lower. When the engine is working very hard (for example, during mountain driving and/or when the outside temperature is high), use a 50 % concentration. This blend will provide adequate protection from corro- sion and boiling.

Braking N00629500260

All the parts of the brake system are critical to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice at regular intervals according to the WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.

When brakes are wet Check the brake system while driving at a low speed immedi- ately after starting, especially when the brakes are wet, to con- firm they work normally. A film of water can be formed on the brake discs and prevent normal braking after driving in heavy rain or through large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal.

When driving in cold weather On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking system, making the brakes less effective. While driving in such conditions, pay close attention to preceding and following vehicles and to the condition of the road surface. From time to time, lightly depress the brake pedal and check how effective the brakes are.

When driving downhill It is important to take advantage of the engine braking by shift- ing to a lower gear while driving on steep downhill roads in order to prevent the brakes from overheating.

WARNING! Never open the radiator cap when the radiator is

hot. You could be seriously burned.

BK0121200US.book 6

Driving safety

4-7

4

Parking N00629600229

Parking on a hill When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set when parked and that the selector lever is in the P (PARK) position. When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking brake before moving the selector lever to the P (PARK) position. This prevents loading the parking brake against the transaxle gear. When this happens, it is difficult to move the selector lever out of the P (PARK) position.

Parking with the engine running Never leave the engine running while you take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the engine running in a closed or poorly ventilated place.

Where you park

When leaving the vehicle Always remove the key from the ignition switch and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area.

WARNING! Leaving the engine running risks injury or death

from accidentally moving the selector lever or the accumulation of toxic exhaust fumes in the passen- ger compartment.

WARNING! Do not park your vehicle in areas where combustible

materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.

BK0121200US.book 7

4-8

Driving safety

4

Loading information N00629900381

It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and non-factory- installed options. The tire and loading information placard located on the drivers door sill of your vehicle will show how much weight it may properly carry.

It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:

Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.

Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by two.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum of - (a) Curb weight; (b) Accessory weight; (c) Vehicle capacity weight; and (d) Production options weight.

Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant.

Accessory weight: the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power win- dows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory- installed equipment (whether installed or not).

Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the vehicles designated seating capacity.

Production options weight: the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride level- ers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg) times the num- ber of specified occupants. (In your vehicle the number is 3)

Occupant distribution: distribution of occupants in a vehi- cle as specified. (In your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, 1 in second seat)

WARNING! Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can dam-

age your vehicle, adversely affect vehicle perfor- mance, including handling and braking, cause tire failure, and result in an accident.

*: 150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one person as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian regulations.

BK0121200US.book 8

Driving safety

4-9

4

Tire and loading information placard N00630100211

The tire and loading information placard is located on the drivers door sill.

This placard shows the maximum number of occupants permit- ted to ride in your vehicle as well as the combined weight of occupants and cargo (C), which is called the vehicle capacity weight. This placard also tells you the size and recommended inflation pressure for the original equipment tires on your vehi- cle. For more information, refer to Tires on page 7-19.

Type 1

A- Vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada (Type 1) B- Vehicles sold in Canada (Type 2)

BK0121200US.book 9

4-10

Driving safety

4

Type 2 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit N00630200065

1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occu- pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Con- sult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE The above steps for determining correct load limit

were written in accordance with U.S.A. regulations. Your vehicle cannot tow a trailer, so step 6 is irrele- vant.

BK0121200US.book 10

Driving safety

4-11

4

NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying seating config-

urations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.

For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, see the Specifications section of this manual.

BK0121200US.book 11

4-12

Driving safety

4

Cargo loads N00629700419

Cargo load precautions To determine the cargo load capacity for your vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. For added information, if needed, refer to Step for Determining Correct Load Limit on page 4-10. DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers listed on the safety certification label (A) located on the inside sill of the drivers door as the guide for passengers and/or cargo weight.

WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, the

combined weights of the driver, passengers and cargo and must never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will adversely affect vehicle performance, including handling and braking, and may cause an accident.

Do not load cargo or luggage higher than the top of the seatback. Be sure that your cargo or luggage cannot move when your vehicle is in motion. Having either the rear view blocked, or your cargo being thrown inside the cabin if you suddenly have to brake can cause a serious accident or injury or death.

Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of your vehi- cle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

BK0121200US.book 12

Driving safety

4-13

4

Trailer towing N00629800061

WARNING! Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing. It may not

be possible to maintain control or adequate braking.

BK0121200US.book 13

BK0121200US.book 14

5

Comfort controls

Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 2 Manual air conditioning (if so equipped). . . . . . . .5- 5 Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) . . . . .5- 13 Important air conditioning operating tips . . . . . . .5- 21 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 22 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD

player-Type 1 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 24 AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD

autochanger-Type 2 (if so equipped) AM/FM/Satellite electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 3 (if so equipped) . .5- 37

To use the external audio input function . . . . . . . .5- 60 Steering wheel remote control switch

(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 62 Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 64 Error codes (SIRIUS Satellite Radio) . . . . . . . . . .5- 66 Handling of compact discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 68 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 71 General information about your radio . . . . . . . . . .5- 72

BK0121200US.book 1

5-2

Comfort controls

5

Vents N00729900193

NOTE Do not place beverages on top of the instrument panel. If

they splash into the air conditioning vents, they could damage the system.

Air flow and direction adjustments N00730200053

Center/Side vents Adjust the direction of the air flow by moving the knob (A).

NOTE On rare occasions, air from the vents of an air-conditioned

vehicle may be foggy. This is only moist air cooling sud- denly and does not indicate a problem.

1- Center vents 2- Side vents

Center vents Side vents

BK0121200US.book 2

Comfort controls

5-3

5

Changing the mode selection N00736400507

To change the position and amount of air flowing from the vents, turn the mode selection dial. (Refer to Mode selection dial on page 5-7, 5-15.) These symbols are used in the next several illustrations to dem- onstrate the quantity of air coming from the vents.

: Small amount of air from the vents : Medium amount of air from the vents : Large amount of air from the vents

Face position Air flows only to the upper part of the passenger compartment.

Foot/Face position Air flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment, and flows to the leg area.

NOTE With the mode selection dial between the and

positions, air flows mainly to the upper part of the passen- ger compartment. With the mode selection dial between the and positions, air flows mainly to the leg area.

BK0121200US.book 3

5-4

Comfort controls

5

Foot position Air flows mainly to the leg area.

Foot/Defroster position Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and the door windows.

NOTE With the mode selection dial between the and

positions, air flows mainly to the leg area. With the mode selection dial between the and positions, air flows mainly to the windshield and door windows.

BK0121200US.book 4

Comfort controls

5-5

5

Defroster position Air flows mainly to the windshield and the door windows.

NOTE When the mode selection dial is set to the or

position, the air conditioning compressor runs automati- cally. The outside air position will also be selected auto- matically. (In this case, the air conditioning indicator light will not change.)

Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) N00730300139

The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is run- ning.

Control panel N00730500232

1- Temperature control dial 2- Air selection switch 3- Blower speed selection dial 4- Air conditioning switch 5- Electric rear window defogger switch P.3-90 6- Mode selection dial

BK0121200US.book 5

5-6

Comfort controls

5

Blower speed selection dial N00736500159

When the ignition key is in the ON position, select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial. The blower speed will gradually increase as the dial is turned to the right. When the blower speed selection dial is set to the OFF posi- tion, all fan-driven airflow will stop.

Temperature control dial N00736600118

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the air cooler.

NOTE While the engine coolant temperature is low, the tempera-

ture of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with the dial.

For instructions on how to use the MAX A/C position (A), see Cooling on page 5-10.

BK0121200US.book 6

Comfort controls

5-7

5

Mode selection dial N00736700076

To change the position and amount of air flowing from the vents, turn the mode selection dial. (Refer to Changing the mode selection on page 5-3.)

Air selection switch N00736800338

Normally, use the outside position to keep the windshield and side windows clear and to quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield.

To change the air selection, simply press the air selection switch.

Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}

If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, use the recirculation position. Switch to the outside position every now and then to keep the windows from fogging up.

CAUTION! Using recirculated air for a long time may cause the

windows to fog up.

BK0121200US.book 7

5-8

Comfort controls

5

NOTE When the or position is selected, you cannot

turn the air conditioning off or use the recirculation posi- tion. This prevents the windows from fogging up.

When the mode selection dial is set to a position other than or , the air selection will automatically change to outside air. The air conditioning will revert to the previous condition in which the or posi- tion was not selected.

When the temperature control dial is set to the MAX A/C position, the air selection will be automatically set to the recirculation position.

If the temperature dial is set to any position other than MAX A/C, outside air will always be used when the ignition switch is turned on.

When the coolant temperature rises above a certain point, the air selection is automatically switched to the recirculation position and the indicator light (A) turns on. When this occurs, the system will not switch to the out- side air position until the coolant temperature goes down, even if the selection switch is pushed.

Air conditioning switch N00731000407

Push the switch, and the air conditioning compressor will turn on. The air conditioning indicator light (A) will come on.

Push the switch again and the air conditioning compressor will stop and the indicator light (A) goes off.

CAUTION! Using the air conditioning slightly increases the

engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when shifting the transaxle into drive.

(Green)

BK0121200US.book 8

Comfort controls

5-9

5

NOTE If a problem is detected in the air conditioning compres-

sor, the air conditioning indicator light (A) blinks. Press the air conditioning switch once to turn it off, then once more to turn it back on. If the air conditioning indicator light does not blink, there is no problem. If it does blink, have it checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Sometimes, for example after using a high-pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet, and the air conditioning indicator light (A) blinks temporarily. In this case there is nothing wrong. Wait for a while, press the air conditioning switch once to turn the system off, then once more to turn it back on. Once the water evaporates, the blinking will stop.

Operating the air conditioning system N00731100235

Heating Set the mode selection dial to the position and set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or counterclock- wise to the desired temperature. Select the desired blower speed.

BK0121200US.book 9

5-10

Comfort controls

5

Cooling N00731200294

For ordinary cooling

1. Set the mode selection dial to the position. 2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position. 3. Push the air conditioning switch (B). 4. Change the temperature by turning the control dial clock-

wise or counterclockwise. 5. Select the desired blower speed.

NOTE If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, set

the air selection switch (A) to the recirculation position. Let in some outside air from time to time for good ventila- tion.

To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection dial to the position.

BK0121200US.book 10

Comfort controls

5-11

5

For quick cooling

1. Set the mode selection dial to the position. 2. Set the temperature control dial to the MAX A/C posi-

tion. 3. Set the blower to the maximum speed.

NOTE When the temperature control dial is set to the MAX

A/C position, the air conditioning compressor will run automatically and the light will come on. The recirculation position will be selected automatically. In this case, you cannot turn the air conditioning off or select the outside position.

When the temperature control dial is set to a position other than MAX A/C, the air selection will automatically change to outside air. The air conditioning compressor will continue running.

Combination of unheated air and heated air N00731300237

Select the mode selection dial to the positions shown in the illustration and set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.

The air flow will be directed to the leg area and the upper part of the passenger compartment. Select the desired blower speed. Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated or slightly warm air (depending upon temperature setting) flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment.

BK0121200US.book 11

5-12

Comfort controls

5

Defrosting or defogging the windshield and door win- dows

N00731400498

To remove frost or fog from the windshield and door windows, use the mode selection dial ( or ).

For ordinary defrosting Use this setting to keep the windshield and door windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow).

1. Set the mode selection dial to the position. 2. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower

speed selection dial. 3. Select your desired temperature by turning the tempera-

ture control dial.

CAUTION! For safety, make sure you have a clear view through

all the windows.

BK0121200US.book 12

Comfort controls

5-13

5

For quick defrosting

1. Set the mode selection dial to the position. 2. Set the blower to the maximum speed. 3. Set the temperature to the highest position.

NOTE When the mode selection dial is set to the or

position, the air conditioning compressor runs automati- cally. The outside air position will also be selected auto- matically. (In this case, the air conditioning indicator will not change.)

When the or position is selected, you cannot turn the air conditioning off or use the recirculation posi- tion. This prevents the windows from fogging up.

When defrosting, do not set the temperature control dial near the MAX A/C position. This would blow cool air on the window glass and fog it up.

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) N00731500095

The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is run- ning.

Control panel N00711800513

1- Temperature control dial 2- Air selection switch 3- Blower speed selection dial 4- Air conditioning switch 5- Electric rear window defogger switch P.3-90 6- Mode selection dial

BK0121200US.book 13

5-14

Comfort controls

5

NOTE There is an interior air temperature sensor (A) in the illus-

trated position. Never place anything over the sensor, since doing so will prevent it from functioning properly.

Blower speed selection dial N00736900140

When the ignition key is in the ON position, select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial. The blower speed will gradually increase as the dial is turned to the right. When the blower speed selection dial is set to the OFF posi- tion, all fan-driven airflow will stop.

BK0121200US.book 14

Comfort controls

5-15

5

Temperature control dial N00737000294

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the air cooler.

NOTE While the engine coolant temperature is low, the tempera-

ture of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with the dial.

Mode selection dial N00737100194

To change the position and amount of air flowing from the vents, turn the mode selection dial. (Refer to Changing the mode selection on page 5-3.)

BK0121200US.book 15

5-16

Comfort controls

5

Air selection switch N00737200326

Normally, use the outside position to keep the windshield and side windows clear and to quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield. To change the air selection, simply press the air selection switch.

Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}

If high cooling performance is desired, or if the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, use the recirculation posi- tion. Switch to the outside position every now and then to keep the windows from fogging up.

NOTE When the or position is selected, you cannot

turn the air conditioning off or select the recirculation position. This prevents the windows from fogging up.

When the mode selection dial or the blower speed selec- tion dial is set to the AUTO position again after manual operation, the air selection switch will also be automati- cally controlled.

When the coolant temperature rises above a certain point, the air selection is automatically switched to the recircula- tion position and the indicator light (A) turns on. When this occurs, the system will not switch to the outside air position until the coolant temperature goes down, even if the selection switch is pushed.

CAUTION! Using recirculated air for a long time may cause the

windows to fog up.

BK0121200US.book 16

Comfort controls

5-17

5

Air conditioning switch N00737300330

Push the switch, and the air conditioning compressor will turn on. The air conditioning indicator light (A) will come on.

Push the switch again and the air conditioning compressor will stop and the air conditioning indicator light goes off.

NOTE If a problem is detected in the air conditioning compres-

sor, the air conditioning indicator light (A) blinks. Press the air conditioning switch once to turn it off, then once more to turn it back on. If the air conditioning indicator light does not blink, there is no problem. If it does blink, have it checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Sometimes, for example after using a high-pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet, and the air conditioning indicator light (A) blinks temporarily. In this case there is nothing wrong. Wait for a while, press the air conditioning switch once to turn the system off, then once more to turn it back on. Once the water evaporates, the blinking will stop.

CAUTION! Using the air conditioning slightly increases the

engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when shifting the transaxle into drive.

(Green)

BK0121200US.book 17

5-18

Comfort controls

5

Operating the air conditioning system (automatic mode)

N00731700329

In normal conditions, use the system in the AUTO mode and follow these procedures:

1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the AUTO posi- tion.

2. Select the temperature control dial to the desired tempera- ture. The temperature can be set within a range of around 61 to 89. The temperature may be set higher by turning the dial to the right.

3. Set the mode selection dial to the AUTO position.

The vents (except and ), recirculation/outside air, blower speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will be con- trolled automatically.

NOTE Set the temperature at about 75 under normal conditions. When the temperature is set to the highest or the lowest

setting under the AUTO operation, the air selection and the air conditioning will be automatically changed as fol- lows. Quick Heating (When the temperature is set to the high-

est setting) Outside air will be introduced and the air conditioning will stop.

Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set to the low- est setting) Inside air will be recirculated and the air conditioning will operate.

When the temperature is set to the highest setting, you can turn the air conditioning on.

BK0121200US.book 18

Comfort controls

5-19

5

Operating the air conditioning system (manual mode)

N00731800027

Blower speed and vent mode may be controlled manually by setting the blower speed selection dial and the mode selection dial to the desired positions. To return to automatic operation, set the dials to the AUTO position.

Defrosting or defogging the windshield and door win- dows

N00732400424

To remove frost or fog from the windshield and door windows, use the mode selection dial ( or ).

For ordinary defrosting Use this setting to keep the windshield and door windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow).

1. Set the mode selection dial to the position. 2. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower

speed selection dial. 3. Select your desired temperature by turning the tempera-

ture control dial.

CAUTION! For safety, make sure you have a clear view through

all the windows.

BK0121200US.book 19

5-20

Comfort controls

5

For quick defrosting

1. Set the mode selection dial to the position. 2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. 3. Set the temperature to the highest position.

NOTE When the mode selection dial is set to the or

position, the air conditioning compressor runs automati- cally. The outside air position will also be selected auto- matically. (In this case, the air conditioning indicator light will not change.)

When the or position is selected, you cannot turn the air conditioning off or use the recirculation posi- tion. This prevents the windows from fogging up.

When defrosting, do not set the temperature control dial to the maximum cool position. This would blow cool air on the window glass and fog it up.

To stop the air conditioning N00732500210

To turn the air conditioning off, set the blower speed selection dial to the OFF position. All operations will stop except the air selection.

BK0121200US.book 20

Comfort controls

5-21

5

Important air conditioning operating tips N00733700150

1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the vehicle interior extremely hot which then requires more time to cool. If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the windows for the first few min- utes of air conditioning to expel the hot air.

2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed when the air condi- tioning is in use. The entry of outside air through open windows will reduce cooling efficiency.

3. When running the air conditioning, make sure the air intake, which is located in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air- intake chamber may reduce air flow and plug the water drains.

Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubri- cant recommendations If the air conditioning seems less effective than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant leak. Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

During a long period of disuse The air conditioning should be operated for at least five min- utes each week, even in cold weather. This includes the quick defrosting mode. Operating the air condition system weekly maintains lubrication of the compressor internal parts and maintains the air conditioning in the best operating condition.

CAUTION! The air conditioning system in your vehicle must be

charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56. Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage and may require replacing your vehi- cles entire air conditioning system. The release of refrigerant into the atmosphere is not recommended. The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehicle is designed not to harm the earths ozone layer. How- ever, it may contribute slightly to global warming. It is recommended that the old refrigerant be saved and recycled for future use.

BK0121200US.book 21

5-22

Comfort controls

5

Audio system N00734301020

The audio system can only be used when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.

Audio systems each come with a separate display.

Your vehicle is equipped with the following audio system: (1) AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (Type 1) P.5-24 (2) AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger (Type 2) P.5-37 (3) AM/FM/Satellite electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger (Type 3) P.5-37

A- Display window B- Audio system

BK0121200US.book 22

Comfort controls

5-23

5

NOTE In vehicles with AM/FM electronically tuned radio with

CD autochanger (Type 2), AM/FM/Satellite electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger (Type 3), the display automatically switches to an audio indication when an audio system adjustment is made. The display automati- cally reverts to its original indication about 10 seconds after the audio system adjustment is finished.

To listen to the audio system while the engine is not run- ning, turn the ignition key to the ACC position.

If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, it may create noise from the audio equipment. This does not mean that anything is wrong with your audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment.

If foreign objects or water get into the audio equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor comes from it, immediately turn off the audio system and have it checked at an autho- rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair facility of your choice. Never try to repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio system until it is inspected by a qualified person.

If the audio system is damaged by foreign objects, water, or fire, have the system checked by a qualified technician.

Satellite radio (if so equipped) Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music, sports, news, enter- tainment, and programming for listeners, directly from its sat- ellites and broadcasting studios.

System activation To activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio service, call the toll- free number 888-539-SIRIUS (7474), or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:

1. The Sirius Identification Number (SIRIUS ID). Refer to the section SIRIUS ID indication on page 5-48.

2. Credit card information. 3. Your Vehicle Identification Number. Refer to Vehicle

identification number plate on page 9-2.

SIRIUS, the SIRIUS dog logo and channel names and logos are trademarks of SIRUS Satellite Radio, Inc.

BK0121200US.book 23

5-24

Comfort controls

5

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player-Type 1 (if so equipped) N00734300993

Volume and tone control panel N00711900657

1- PWR (On-Off) switch 2- VOL (Volume control) knob 3- AUDIO switch 4- Display

BK0121200US.book 24

Comfort controls

5-25

5

To adjust the volume N00712000033

VOL (Volume control) Turn the VOL knob (2) clockwise to increase the volume; counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The status will be displayed in the display (4).

NOTE The volume control mode will shut off automatically if

either the radio or CD is selected, or if no adjustment is made within about 2 seconds.

BK0121200US.book 25

5-26

Comfort controls

5

To adjust the tone N00712100340

1. Press the AUDIO switch (3) repeatedly to select the tone or balance control to change. The order is: BASS TRE FADE BAL Audio adjust mode off. The status will be displayed in the display (4).

BK0121200US.book 26

Comfort controls

5-27

5

2. Turn the AUDIO switch (3) either clockwise or counter- clockwise to change the tone/balance setting.

BASS (Bass tone control) To select the desired bass level.

TRE (Treble tone control) To select the desired treble level.

FADE (Front/Rear balance control) To balance the volume from the F (front) and the R (rear) speakers.

BAL (Left/Right balance control) To balance the volume from the L (left) and the R (right) speakers.

NOTE When set to 0, it will beep. The audio adjust mode will automatically shut off when

either the radio or CD is selected, or if no adjustment is made within about 7 seconds.

Mode Adjusting operation

Clockwise Counterclockwise BASS Increase Decrease TRE Increase Decrease

FADE More sound from the rear speakers

More sound from the front speakers

BAL More sound from the right speakers

More sound from the left speakers

BK0121200US.book 27

5-28

Comfort controls

5

Radio control panel and display N00734900843

1- PWR (On-Off) switch 2- Memory select buttons 3- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button 4- SEEK (Up-seek) button 5- SEEK (Down-seek) button 6- SCAN button 7- TUNE/FOLDER switch 8- SCAN indicator 9- AM/FM (AM/FM1/FM2) indicator

10- Preset memory number display 11- ST (Stereo) indicator 12- Frequency display

BK0121200US.book 28

Comfort controls

5-29

5

To listen to the radio N00735000825

1. Press the PWR switch (1) to turn the audio system on and off. The system turns on in the last mode used.

2. Press the RADIO button (3) to select the desired band (AM/FM1/FM2).

3. Press the SEEK button (4 or 5) to tune to a station, or press one of the memory select buttons (2) to tune in to a station memorized for that button.

To tune the radio Automatic tuning

1. After pressing the SEEK button (4 or 5), reception of the selected station will begin.

2. Press the SCAN button (6). SCAN indicator (8) will come on and the radio will tune consecutively to each available station for about 5 seconds per station. If you want to stop scanning, press the SCAN button again. The frequency display of the current station blinks once per second during SCAN.

Manual tuning The frequency changes every time the TUNE/FOLDER switch (7) is turned. Turn the switch to select the desired station.

To enter frequencies into the memory As many as 6 AM and 12 FM stations can be entered into the memory.

To store a frequency in the memory, follow these steps: 1. Press the SEEK button (4 or 5), or turn the

TUNE/FOLDER switch (7) to tune to the frequency you wish to keep in the memory.

2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2) until it beeps. The sound will be momentarily interrupted while the fre- quency is being entered into the memory. The number of the button matching the entry in the memory as well as the frequency are displayed.

3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the button and then releasing it within about 2 seconds.

NOTE Disconnecting the battery cables erases all the radio sta-

tion settings stored in the memory.

BK0121200US.book 29

5-30

Comfort controls

5

CD control panel and display N00735300668

1- PWR (On-Off) switch 11- RPT (Repeat-mode) indicator 2- CD eject button 12- RDM (Random-mode) indicator 3- Disc loading slot 13- SCAN indicator 4- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button 14- CD indicator 5- CD (CD mode changeover) button 15- TRACK indicator 6- TRACK (Track up) button 16- Track play time display 7- TRACK (Track down) button 8- RPT/RDM (Repeat/Random) button 9- SCAN button

10- TUNE/FOLDER switch

BK0121200US.book 30

Comfort controls

5-31

5

To listen to a CD N00735501016

1. Press the CD button (5) and the CD mode will be selected, starting a playback.

2. To adjust the volume and tone, refer to To adjust the vol- ume on page 5-25 and To adjust the tone on page 5-26.

3. To stop the CD, turn off the power by pressing the PWR switch (1) or switch to the other mode by pressing the RADIO button (4).

NOTE For information concerning the handling of the compact

discs, refer to Handling of compact discs on page 5-68.

To listen an MP3 CD This player allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each disc may have a maximum of 16 trees, 100 folders, and 255 files per disc.

Push the CD button (5) if an MP3 CD is already in the slot. The display shows READING, then playback will begin. The folder number and the track number will appear on the dis- play.

BK0121200US.book 31

5-32

Comfort controls

5

NOTE While listening to a disc on which CD-DA (CD-Digital

Audio) and MP3 files have both been recorded, you can switch between reading of the CD-DA and reading of the MP3 files, and the external audio input mode by pressing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a beep).

With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatically played first.

The playback sound quality differs depending on the encoding software and the bit rate. For details, refer to the user manual of your encoding software.

Depending on file/folder configurations on a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.

MP3 encode software and writing software are not sup- plied to this unit.

You may encounter trouble in playing an MP3 recorded with certain writing software or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).

If you record too many folders or files other than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.

This unit does not record MP3 files. For information concerning CD-Rs/RWs, refer to Notes

on CD-Rs/RWs on page 5-70.

Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order (Example)

CAUTION! Attempting to play a file not in the MP3 format

which has the .mp3 file name may produce noise from the speakers and speaker damage, and can damage your hearing.

Folder selection In the order

File selection In the order

Root folder (root directory)

Tree 1 Tree 2 Tree 3 Tree 4

BK0121200US.book 32

Comfort controls

5-33

5

To fast forward/reverse the disc To fast forward or reverse, use the TRACK button (6 or 7).

Fast forward You can fast forward by holding down the side of the TRACK button (6) for more than about 1 second.

Fast reverse You can fast reverse by holding down the side of the TRACK button (7) for more than about 1 second.

To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only) You can select your desired folder by turning the TUNE/FOLDER switch (10).

Folder up Turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (10) clockwise until the desired folder number appears on the display.

Folder down Turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (10) counterclockwise until the desired folder number appears on the display.

BK0121200US.book 33

5-34

Comfort controls

5

To select a desired track You can select by using the TRACK button (6 or 7).

Track up Press the side of the TRACK button (6) until the desired track is reached. The TRACK indicator (15) will display the number of the selected track.

Track down Press the side of the TRACK button (7) until the desired track is reached. The TRACK indicator (15) will display the number of the selected track.

NOTE Pressing the side of the TRACK button (7) once during

the song will cause the CD to restart playing from the beginning of the song.

To repeat the same track or change the order of tracks for playback Press the RPT/RDM button (8) to select RPT RDM RPT/RDM mode off.

To repeat the same track Select the RPT mode, and the RPT indicator (11) will come on. You can listen to the same track repeatedly.

NOTE The track repeat mode will be canceled by pressing the

TRACK button (6 or 7), the SCAN button (9) or the CD eject button (2).

With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be repeated.

To change the order of tracks for playback Random playback for a disc (music CDs only) Select the RDM mode, and the RDM indicator (12) will come on. Tracks are randomly played.

BK0121200US.book 34

Comfort controls

5-35

5

Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3 CDs only) Select the RDM mode, and the RDM indicator (12) will come on. Tracks from all the folders on the disc will be played in a random sequence.

NOTE With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the

random mode causes only files of the same format (CD- DA only or MP3 files only) to be played in a random sequence.

RPT

RDM

Mode off

BK0121200US.book 35

5-36

Comfort controls

5

To find the start of each track on a disc for playback Press the SCAN button (9). SCAN will appear on the display and the player will play back the first 10 seconds of each track on the selected disc. The track number will blink while the scan mode is selected. To exit the scan mode, press the SCAN button again.

NOTE Once all tracks on the disc have been scanned, playback

of the disc will restart from the beginning of the track that was playing when scanning started.

The scan mode will be canceled when radio or CD opera- tion is selected.

With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the scan mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be played.

To eject a disc When the CD eject button (2) is pressed, the disc automatically stops and is ejected. The system automatically switches to radio mode.

BK0121200US.book 36

Comfort controls

5-37

5

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 2 (if so equipped) AM/FM/Satellite electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 3 (if so equipped)

N00734300951

Volume and tone control panel-Type 2, Type 3 N00711900699

1- PWR (On-Off) switch 2- VOL (Volume control) knob 3- Memory select buttons 4- AUDIO switch 5- Display

BK0121200US.book 37

5-38

Comfort controls

5

To adjust the volume N00712000381

VOL (Volume control) Turn the VOL knob (2) clockwise to increase the volume; counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The status will be displayed in the display (5).

NOTE The volume control mode will shut off automatically if

either the radio or CD mode is selected, or if no adjust- ment is made within about 2 seconds.

To adjust the tone N00712100643

1. Press the AUDIO switch (4) repeatedly to select your desired sound customization setting to change. The order is: SUB GAIN BASS MID TRE FADE BAL FIELD TYPE SOUND PRESET Sound customization mode off. The status will be displayed in the display (5).

QUICK ACCESS MODE To access the sound customization features quickly, push and hold the AUDIO switch (4), then turn the switch clockwise or counterclockwise to access your desired sound customization setting. Release the switch to adjust the setting.

Example

BK0121200US.book 38

Comfort controls

5-39

5

2. Turn the AUDIO switch (4) either clockwise or counter- clockwise to adjust the sound customization features.

SUB GAIN (Subwoofer tone control) To select the desired subwoofer GAIN level.

BASS (Bass tone control) To select the desired bass level.

MID (Midrange tone control) To select the desired midrange level.

TRE (Treble tone control) To select the desired treble level.

FADE (Front/Rear balance control) To balance the volume from the F (front) and the R (rear) speakers.

BAL (Left/Right balance control) To balance the volume from the L (left) and the R (right) speakers.

FIELD (Sound field type select) To select the desired sound field.

Mode Adjusting operation

Clockwise Counterclockwise SUB GAIN Increase Decrease

BASS Increase Decrease MID Increase Decrease TRE Increase Decrease

FADE More sound from the rear speakers

More sound from the front speakers

BAL More sound from the right speakers

More sound from the left speakers

FIELD NORMAL STU- DIO CLUB

CONCERT

CONCERT CLUB STUDIO

NORMAL

TYPE

NONE POP ROCK

R+B/R&B COUNTRY

COUNTRY R+B/R&B

ROCK POP NONE

SOUND PRESET

Sound field type Description

NORMAL Optimized for accurate vocal and instrument reality.

STUDIO Places the listener in the control room of a recording studio with a crisp and accurate forward placed sound stage.

CLUB Places the listener in the music at a dance or jazz club with sound coming from all direc- tions.

CONCERT

Utilizing sound reflections in the Digital Signal Processor, CONCERT gives the impression that the listener is at concert hall performance.

BK0121200US.book 39

5-40

Comfort controls

5

TYPE (Music type select) To select the desired equalizer type.

SOUND PRESETS (sound setting storage) 6 different sound settings can be stored into memory in the SOUND PRESET mode. For example:

To store your current sound settings into memory, follow these steps:

1. Go to the SOUND PRESET setting (preset button lights will be flashing).

2. Push one of the memory select buttons (3) for more than 2 seconds.

To recall the sound settings that are stored in memory, follow these steps:

1. Go to the SOUND PRESET setting (preset button lights will be flashing).

2. Push your desired memory select button (3) for less than 2 seconds.

NOTE The sound will be momentarily interrupted when the

sound customization mode is switched between SUB GAIN, FIELD, and TYPE. This does not indicate a prob- lem.

The sound customization adjust mode will automatically shut off when either the radio or CD is selected, or if no adjustment is made within 7 seconds.

If the AUDIO switch (4) is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds during the audio adjust mode, it will change to Hold mode. The selected audio mode will be held until the AUDIO switch (4) is pushed for more than 2 seconds again.

Music type Description NONE Sounds good for all types of music. POP Tight bass and high frequency sound

ROCK Tuned for hard rock and heavy metal with powerful drums, guitars, and vocals.

R+B/R&B Clear bass and well-defined vocals COUNTRY Enhanced main vocals

Settings Preset 1 Preset 2 Preset 3 SUB GAIN -9 dB -3 dB +3 dB

BASS +1 0 0 MID 0 0 0 TRE +2 +1 0

FADE 0 0 0 BAL 0 0 0

FIELD CLUB NORMAL STUDIO TYPE POP COUNTRY ROCK

BK0121200US.book 40

Comfort controls

5-41

5

Speed Compensated Volume function N00752200226

Speed Compensated Volume function is a feature that automat- ically adjusts the VOL, BASS, MID, and TREBLE settings in accordance with the vehicle speed. It is possible to turn this function ON-OFF using the following methods:

1. If you are presently pushing the AUDIO switch (4) and making a tone adjustment, finish making the tone adjust- ment.

2. Push the AUDIO switch (4) for at least about 2 seconds. The system will switch to MENU mode and the characters SCV Select will be shown on the display.

3. Turn the AUDIO switch (4) clockwise to the turn the function ON. Turn it counterclockwise to turn the function OFF.

NOTE The MENU mode will automatically shut off when either

the radio or CD is selected or the user does not move any of the switches for 7 seconds.

BK0121200US.book 41

5-42

Comfort controls

5

Radio control panel and display-Type 2 N00734900827

1- PWR (On-Off) switch 2- Memory select buttons 3- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button 4- SEEK (Up-seek) button 5- SEEK (Down-seek) button 6- SCAN button 7- TUNE/FOLDER switch 8- SCAN indicator 9- AM/FM (AM/FM1/FM2) indicator

10- Preset memory number display 11- ST (Stereo) indicator 12- Frequency display

BK0121200US.book 42

Comfort controls

5-43

5

To listen to the radio N00735000870

1. Press the PWR switch (1) or RADIO button (3) to turn on the radio. Press the PWR switch again to switch it off.

2. Press the RADIO button (3) to select the desired band (AM/FM1/FM2).

3. Press the SEEK button (4 or 5) to tune to a station, or press one of the memory select buttons (2) to tune in to a station memorized for that button.

To tune the radio Automatic tuning

1. After pressing the SEEK button (4 or 5), reception of the selected station will begin.

2. Press the SCAN button (6). SCAN indicator (8) will come on and the radio will tune consecutively to each available station for about 5 seconds per station. If you want to stop scanning, press the SCAN button again. The frequency display of the current station blinks once per second during SCAN.

Manual tuning The frequency changes every time the TUNE/FOLDER switch (7) is turned. Turn the switch to select the desired station.

To enter frequencies into the memory As many as 6 AM and 12 FM stations can be entered into the memory.

To store a frequency in the memory, follow these steps: 1. Press the SEEK button (4 or 5), or turn the

TUNE/FOLDER switch (7) to tune to the frequency you wish to keep in the memory.

2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2) until it beeps. The sound will be momentarily interrupted while the fre- quency is being entered into the memory. The number of the button matching the entry in the memory as well as the frequency are displayed.

3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the button and then releasing it within about 2 seconds.

NOTE Disconnecting the battery cables erases all the radio sta-

tion settings stored in the memory.

BK0121200US.book 43

5-44

Comfort controls

5

Radio control panel and display-Type 3 N00734900830

1- PWR (On-Off) switch 2- Memory select buttons 3- RADIO (AM/FM/Satellite selection) button 4- SEEK (Up-seek) button 5- SEEK (Down-seek) button 6- SCAN button 7- TUNE/FOLDER switch 8- SCAN indicator 9- AM/FM/SAT (AM/FM1/FM2/SAT1/SAT2/SAT3/SAT4)

indicator 10- Preset memory number display 11- ST (Stereo) indicator 12- Frequency display

BK0121200US.book 44

Comfort controls

5-45

5

To listen to the radio N00735000883

1. Press the PWR switch (1) or RADIO button (3) to turn on the radio. Press the PWR switch again to switch it off.

2. Press the RADIO button (3) to select the desired band (AM/FM1/FM2/SAT1/SAT2/SAT3/SAT4).

3. Press the SEEK button (4 or 5) to tune to a station, or press one of the memory select buttons (2) to tune in to a station memorized for that button.

To tune the radio Automatic tuning

1. After pressing the SEEK button (4 or 5), reception of the selected station will begin.

2. Press the SCAN button (6). SCAN indicator (8) will come on and the radio will tune consecutively to each available station for about 5 seconds per station. If you want to stop scanning, press the SCAN button again. The frequency display of the current station blinks once per second during SCAN.

Manual tuning The frequency changes every time the TUNE/FOLDER switch (7) is turned. Turn the switch to select the desired station.

To enter frequencies into the memory As many as 6 AM, 12 FM and 24 SAT stations can be entered into the memory.

To store a frequency in the memory, follow these steps: 1. Press the SEEK button (4 or 5), or turn the

TUNE/FOLDER switch (7) to tune to the frequency you wish to keep in the memory.

2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2) until it beeps. The sound will be momentarily interrupted while the fre- quency is being entered into the memory. The number of the button matching the entry in the memory as well as the frequency are displayed.

3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the button and then releasing it within about 2 seconds.

NOTE Disconnecting the battery cables erases all the radio sta-

tion settings stored in the memory.

BK0121200US.book 45

5-46

Comfort controls

5

SIRIUS Satellite Radio control panel and display-Type 3 N00700200243

1. PWR (On-Off) switch 2. RADIO (AM/FM/Satellite selection) button 3. SEEK (Down-seek) button 4. SEEK (Up-seek) button 5. SCAN button 6. TUNE/FOLDER (Category selection) switch/AUDIO switch 7. Memory select buttons 8. Display 9. Preset memory number display

10. Channel number 11. SCAN indicator

BK0121200US.book 46

Comfort controls

5-47

5

To listen to SIRIUS Satellite Radio N00700300026

1. If the audio system is OFF, turn it ON by pushing the PWR switch (1). The audio system will start working in the previously used mode. Push the RADIO button (2) to turn ON the radio.

2. Push the RADIO button (2) to select your desired band (SAT1/SAT2/SAT3/SAT4). Each time you push the but- ton, the indication will change to the next one in the fol- lowing sequence: AM FM1 FM2 SAT1 SAT2 SAT3 SAT4. When SIRIUS has appeared on the display, the radio will receive satellite radio.

Category selection N00700400027

1. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (6) to activate the cate- gory selection mode. The category number (CAT1 to CAT12) of the channel currently being received will be indicated. If the vehicle has a multi center display, the cat- egory name (POP to ENTERTAINMENT) will be shown.

2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (6) to select your desired category.

NOTE Even when categories are changed, the currently selected

channel does not change. To select your desired channel, use the SEEK button (3 or 4).

If you do not operate any switch for 15 seconds, the cate- gory selection mode will be canceled.

Channel selection N00700500028

Push the SEEK button (3 or 4) to select a channel.

NOTE While the system is in category selection mode, only the

channels in the currently selected category can be selected.

Scan function N00700600016

1. If you push the SCAN button (5), the system will select receivable channels one by one, receiving each one for about 7 seconds.

2. To cancel the SCAN mode, push the SCAN button (5) once more.

NOTE While the system is in category selection mode, only

channels in the currently selected category are scanned.

To store a channel in memory N00700700020

It is possible to store one channel for each memory select but- tons (7) in memory. (It is possible to store a maximum of 24 channels in memory.) Store a channel in memory using the fol- lowing procedure:

1. Push the SEEK button (3 or 4) to select the channel you wish to store in memory.

2. Store the channel in memory by pushing one of the mem- ory select buttons (7) until you hear a beep.

BK0121200US.book 47

5-48

Comfort controls

5

NOTE Once you have stored channels in memory, you can

instantly call up a desired channel by just pushing the cor- responding memory select buttons (7).

SIRIUS ID indication N00700800047

If you push the SEEK button (3 or 4) to select CH 0, the SIR- IUS ID will be indicated.

1. If you select CH 0, the first 4 digits of the 12-digit SIR- IUS ID will be indicated 2 seconds later.

2. Turn the AUDIO switch (6) clockwise to view the next 4 digits. If you turn it clockwise while the last 4 digits are indicated, the first four digits will be indicated again. If you turn the AUDIO switch counterclockwise, indications will be given in the opposite sequence. The indications are given in the following sequence: first 4 digits middle 4 digits last 4 digits.

3. To stop the SIRIUS ID indication, push the SEEK button (3 or 4) to select a channel other than CH 0.

NOTE If you wait 15 seconds without operating any switch while

the SIRIUS ID is being indicated, the indication will change to CH 0. 2 seconds later, the SIRIUS ID will again be indicated.

BK0121200US.book 48

Comfort controls

5-49

5

To skip or lock a desired channel using the MENU mode

N00701100047

It is possible to make a setting to skip or lock a desired channel during channel selection.

1. If you push the AUDIO switch (6) for at least about two seconds while the system is receiving a satellite radio channel, the system will switch to MENU mode.

2. In the MENU mode, satellite radio channel SKIP setting and LOCK setting and Speed Compensated Volume func- tion (refer to Speed Compensated Volume function on page 5-41) is possible. Each time you push the AUDIO switch (6), the status will change to the next one in the following sequence: SCV Select (Speed Compensated Volume function) SKIP setting (the SKIP setting mode) LOCK setting (the LOCK setting mode) Menu mode off

NOTE The MENU mode will automatically shut off when either

the radio or CD is selected or the user does not move any of the switches for 7 seconds.

SKIP settings, LOCK settings, and the lock cancellation code are stored in memory. If a battery cable is discon- nected, they will be erased. (The code will return to the 1111 that was set at the factory.)

SKIP setting (SKIP setting mode) N00701200048

It is possible to set a channel to be skipped during channel selection. It is also possible to cancel a skip setting. By turning the AUDIO switch (6), you can select SKIP or ALL UNSKIP. These functions are described below.

LOCK setting (LOCK setting mode) N00701300049

It is possible to lock a channel. It is also possible to cancel a lock setting. By turning the AUDIO switch (6), you can select CH LOCK (or UNLOCK), UNLOCK ALL, or CODE EDIT. These functions are described below:

NOTE When the channel that is currently being received is not

locked, you can select CH LOCK. When the channel that is currently being received is locked, you can select UNLOCK.

SKIP : Sets the channel that is currently being received to be skipped.

ALL UNSKIP : Cancels all channel skip settings.

CH LOCK : Sets the channel that is currently being received to be locked.

UNLOCK : Sets the channel that is currently being received to be unlocked.

UNLOCK ALL : Cancels all channel lock settings. CODE EDIT : Changes the lock cancellation code.

BK0121200US.book 49

5-50

Comfort controls

5

To skip a desired channel N00701400040

It is possible to set a channel to not be received during channel selection.

1. Select the channel you wish to be skipped. 2. Push the AUDIO switch (6) for at least about 2 seconds to

select the MENU mode. Then select the SKIP setting mode.

3. In the SKIP setting mode, turn the AUDIO switch (6) to select SKIP.

4. Push the AUDIO switch (6) to set the channel that is cur- rently being received to be skipped. When you have made the setting, the system will return to the SKIP setting mode. (The display will show SKIP setting after show- ing STORED.)

NOTE Any channel for which a skip setting has been made is

automatically skipped during channel selection. A channel that is stored in the preset memory is also

skipped during channel selection. If you push the corre- sponding memory select buttons (7) to call up the channel, the display will show SKIPD and the audio will be muted.

To cancel skip settings N00701500041

It is possible to cancel channel skip settings. 1. Push the AUDIO switch (6) for at least about 2 seconds to

select the MENU mode. Then select the SKIP setting mode.

2. In the SKIP setting mode, turn the AUDIO switch (6) to select ALL UNSKIP.

3. Push the AUDIO switch (6). All channel skip settings will be cancelled. Then, the system will return to the SKIP set- ting mode. (The display will show SKIP setting after showing STORED.)

To lock a desired channel N00701600042

It is possible to lock a desired channel so that it cannot be selected.

1. Select the channel you wish to lock. 2. Push the AUDIO switch (6) for at least about 2 seconds to

select the MENU mode. Then select the LOCK setting mode.

3. In the LOCK setting mode, turn the AUDIO switch (6) to select CH LOCK.

4. Push the AUDIO switch (6). The channel currently being received will be locked. Then, the system will return to the LOCK setting mode.

NOTE If you attempt to select a locked channel, the display will

show LOCKED. Channels stored in the preset memory are also locked.

BK0121200US.book 50

Comfort controls

5-51

5

To unlock locked channels N00701700056

You can unlock one or all locked channels. Unlocking one or more channels requires entry of the code.

NOTE The code is set to 1111 at the factory. It is possible to change the code to any desired number

using CODE EDIT.

1. If you wish to unlock a single desired channel, select the channel you wish to unlock. (If you wish to unlock all locked channels, it doesnt matter which channel you select.)

2. Push the AUDIO switch (6) for at least about two seconds to select the MENU mode. Then select the LOCK setting mode.

3. In the LOCK setting mode, turn the AUDIO switch (6) to select UNLOCK if you wish to unlock a single desired channel or UNLOCK ALL if you wish to unlock all locked channels.

4. Push the AUDIO switch (6). The code entry window will display.

5. Use the memory select buttons (7) to enter the code (1111 to 6666).

6. If you entered the correct code, the channel lock setting will be cancelled and the system will return to the LOCK setting mode. If you entered an incorrect code, a warning sound will be emitted and CODE E will be displayed. Then, the code entry window will again display. You can retry the code entry any number of times.

BK0121200US.book 51

5-52

Comfort controls

5

To change the lock cancellation code N00701800057

It is possible to change the code for lock cancellation to any desired number.

1. Push the AUDIO switch (6) for at least about 2 seconds to select the MENU mode. Then select the LOCK setting mode.

2. In the LOCK setting mode, turn the AUDIO switch (6) to select CODE EDIT.

3. Push the AUDIO switch (6). The code entry window will display.

4. Use the memory select buttons (7) to enter the current code (the code prior to the change).

5. If you entered the correct code, the code entry window will again be shown. Enter your desired code. If you entered an incorrect code, a warning sound will be emitted and CODE E will be displayed. Then, the code entry window will again be shown. You can retry the code entry any number of times.

6. After entering the new code, push the AUDIO switch (6). The code entry window will again be shown for confirma- tion. Enter the new code again, then push the AUDIO switch (6).

7. The code will be changed, and the system will return to the LOCK setting mode.

NOTE The code is stored in memory. If a battery cable is discon-

nected, such settings will be erased. (The code will return to the 1111 that was set at the factory.)

To reset the lock cancellation code N00701900045

In case you forget the code, it is possible to reset the code to the 1111 that was set at the factory.

1. With the audio power OFF, push the PWR switch (1) and AUDIO switch (6) simultaneously. The display will show CODE INITIAL.

2. Push the AUDIO switch (6). The display will show YES. If you wish to reset the code, push the AUDIO switch (6) again. If you do not wish to reset the code, turn the AUDIO switch (6) so the display shows CANCEL and then push the AUDIO switch (6) again.

BK0121200US.book 52

Comfort controls

5-53

5

CD control panel and display-Type 2, Type 3 N00735300714

1- LOAD-EJECT button 2- Disc loading slot 3- DISC select buttons 4- PWR (On-Off) switch 5- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button 6- CD (CD mode changeover) button 7- TRACK (Track up) button 8- TRACK (Track down) button 9- RPT/RDM (Repeat/Random) button

10- SCAN button 11- TUNE/FOLDER switch 12- CD indicator 13- DISC indicator 14- TRACK indicator 15- RPT (Repeat-mode) indicator

16- RDM (Random-mode) indicator 17- Track play time display 18- SCAN indicator

BK0121200US.book 53

5-54

Comfort controls

5

To listen to a CD N00735501029

1. Press the CD button (6) and the CD mode will be selected, starting a playback.

NOTE As many as 6 CDs can be inserted into the CD

autochanger.

2. To adjust the volume and tone, refer to To adjust the vol- ume on page 5-38 and To adjust the tone on page 5-38.

3. To stop the disc, turn off the power by pressing the PWR switch (4) or switch to the other mode by pressing the RADIO button (5).

NOTE For information concerning the handling of the compact

discs, refer to Handling of compact discs on page 5-68.

To set a disc The indicator light (A) shows the condition of each disc slot.

To set a disc: 1. Press the LOAD/EJECT button (1). 2. Press one of the Disc select buttons (3) to select the disc

which you wish to insert. 3. If there is already a disc loaded in the slot, the disc is auto-

matically ejected. If there is no disc, insert the disc in the slot (2) after the READY light (B) illuminates.

Light off: No disc Amber: Disc is set Green: Disc is played (or selected)

BK0121200US.book 54

Comfort controls

5-55

5

NOTE When the first disc has played to the end, the second disc

will start to play automatically. When the second, third, fourth, fifth, and sixth discs have each played to the end, the sequence will begin again from the first disc.

To listen an MP3 CD This autochanger allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each disc may have a maximum of 16 trees, 100 folders, and 255 files per disc.

Push the CD button (6) if MP3 CDs are already in the autochanger. The display shows READING, then playback will begin. The folder number and the track number will appear on the dis- play.

BK0121200US.book 55

5-56

Comfort controls

5

NOTE While listening to a disc on which CD-DA (CD-Digital

Audio) and MP3 files have both been recorded, you can switch between reading of the CD-DA and reading of the MP3 files, and the external audio input mode by pressing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a beep).

With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatically played first.

The playback sound quality differs depending on the encoding software and the bit rate. For details, refer to the user manual of your encoding software.

Depending on file/folder configurations on a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.

MP3 encode software and writing software are not sup- plied to this unit.

You may encounter trouble in playing an MP3 recorded with certain writing software or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).

If you record too many folders or files other than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.

This unit does not record MP3 files. For information concerning CD-Rs/RWs, refer to Notes

on CD-Rs/RWs on page 5-70.

Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order (Example)

CAUTION! Attempting to play a file not in the MP3 format

which has the .mp3 file name may produce noise from the speakers and speaker damage, and can damage your hearing.

Folder selection In the order

File selection In the order

Root folder (root directory)

Tree 1 Tree 2 Tree 3 Tree 4

BK0121200US.book 56

Comfort controls

5-57

5

To fast forward/reverse the disc To fast forward or reverse, use the TRACK button (7 or 8).

Fast forward You can fast forward by holding down the side of the TRACK button (7) for more than about 1 second.

Fast reverse You can fast reverse by holding down the side of the TRACK button (8) for more than about 1 second.

To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only) You can select your desired folder by turning the TUNE/FOLDER switch (11).

Folder up Turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (11) clockwise until the desired folder number appears on the display.

Folder down Turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (11) counterclockwise until the desired folder number appears on the display.

BK0121200US.book 57

5-58

Comfort controls

5

To select a desired track You can select by using the TRACK button (7 or 8).

Track up Press the side of the TRACK button (7) until the desired track is reached. The TRACK indicator (14) will display the number of the selected track.

Track down Press the side of the TRACK button (8) until the desired track is reached. The TRACK indicator (14) will display the number of the selected track.

NOTE Pressing the side of the TRACK button (8) once during

the song will cause the disc to restart playing from the beginning of the song.

To repeat the same track or change the order of tracks for playback Press the RPT/RDM button (9) to select RPT RDM RPT/RDM mode off.

To repeat the same track Select the RPT mode, and the RPT indicator (15) will come on. You can listen to the same track repeatedly.

NOTE The track repeat mode will be canceled by pressing the

TRACK button (7 or 8), the SCAN button (10), the DISC select buttons (3) or the LOAD/EJECT button (1).

With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be repeated.

To change the order of tracks for playback Random playback for all discs in the autochanger (music CDs only) Select the RDM mode, and the RDM indicator (16) will come on. Tracks are randomly selected from all discs loaded in the autochanger.

BK0121200US.book 58

Comfort controls

5-59

5

Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3 CDs only) Select the RDM mode, and the RDM indicator (16) will come on. Tracks from all the folders on the currently selected disc will be played in a random sequence.

NOTE The Random playback mode will be canceled by pressing

the SCAN button (10) or the LOAD/EJECT button (1). In the all discs random mode, if an MP3 CD has been

loaded in the autochanger, the autochanger will skip over it to the next music CD.

With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the random mode causes only files of the same format (CD- DA only or MP3 files only) to be played in a random sequence.

RPT

RDM

Mode off

BK0121200US.book 59

5-60

Comfort controls

5

To find the start of each track on a disc for playback Press the SCAN button (10). SCAN will appear on the dis- play and the autochanger will play back the first 10 seconds of each track on the selected disc. The track number will blink while the scan mode is selected. To exit the scan mode, press the SCAN button again.

NOTE Once all tracks on the disc have been scanned, playback

of the disc will restart from the beginning of the track that was playing when scanning started.

The scan mode will be canceled when radio or CD opera- tion is selected.

With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the scan mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be played.

To eject a disc Press the LOAD/EJECT button (1). Then press one of the Disc select buttons (3) to select the disc which you would like to eject.

NOTE When any disc is ejected, the system automatically

switches from CD mode to radio mode. If you do not remove the disc before 15 seconds have

elapsed, the autochanger will automatically reload the disc and stop.

To use the external audio input function N00702200159

You can listen to commercially available audio equipment, such as a portable audio system, from your vehicles speakers, by connecting the audio equipment to the auxiliary audio con- nector (A).

NOTE Use a stereo mini-jack connector to connect the audio

equipment to the auxiliary audio connector.

Auxiliary Audio connector (mini-jack)

BK0121200US.book 60

Comfort controls

5-61

5

To activate the external audio input mode

1. Connect the headphone port of the portable audio system to the auxiliary audio connector (A) using a commercially available connection cord.

2. Press the CD button (B) for more than 2 seconds. The display (C) will show AUX and then the external audio input mode will be activated.

3. To deactivate the external audio input mode, press the RADIO button (D) or the CD button (B) to switch to another mode.

NOTE The connected audio equipment cannot be operated with

the vehicles audio system. Depending on the connected audio equipment, it may pro-

duce noise from the speakers. Use the connected audio equipments own power source,

such as its battery. Noise may be produced from the speakers if the connected audio equipment is used while charging it using the acces- sory socket of the vehicle.

Do not activate the external audio input mode when no audio equipment is connected. Otherwise, noise may be produced from the speakers.

Connect audio equipment when the external audio input mode is deactivated or lower the vehicles speaker volume before connecting it. Noise may be produced from the speakers if audio equip- ment is connected after the external audio input mode is activated.

Compared to the CD player mode and radio mode, the vehicles speaker volume will be lower in the external audio input mode. Therefore, be careful when switching from the external audio input mode to the CD player mode or radio mode since the speaker volume will be higher.

Do not use excessive force on the connection cord. Other- wise, the cord and connectors may be damaged.

If the connection cord alone is left connected to the auxil- iary audio connector, noise may be produced from the speakers.

For information on how to connect and operate the com- mercially available audio equipment, refer to the owners manual for the commercially available audio equipment.

CAUTION! Do not operate the connected audio equipment while

driving. This could distract you and an accident might occur.

BK0121200US.book 61

5-62

Comfort controls

5

Steering wheel remote control switch (if so equipped)

N00714800312

The remote control switches are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches. These switches can be used when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.

NOTE Do not push two or more of the steering wheel remote

control switches at the same time.

To turn on the power PWR ON/OFF button 4 When the power is off, press this button to turn the power on. To turn the power off, press this button for 2 seconds or longer.

To adjust the volume Volume up button 2 The volume will increase when this button is pressed.

Volume down button 6 The volume will decrease when this button is pressed.

To listen to the audio system Select the desired mode by lightly pressing the Mode change button (4). The mode switches between the radio and CD with each push of the button.

To listen to the radio To select AM/FM/SAT mode Mode change button 4 Select the desired band by pressing this button. The order is: AM FM1 FM2 (SAT1 SAT2 SAT3 SAT4) CD AM.

1- Seek up/Track up/Fast-forward button 2- Volume up button 3- Preset change/Folder up/Disc up button 4- PWR (ON/OFF)/Mode change button 5- Seek down/Track down/Fast-reverse button 6- Volume down button

BK0121200US.book 62

Comfort controls

5-63

5

Automatic radio tuning Seek up button 1/Seek down button 5 After pressing these buttons, reception of the selected station will begin.

Category selection (vehicle with satellite radio) Seek up button 1/Seek down button 5 Keep one of the buttons pressed to scan through the categories. When your desired category is reached, release the button.

To select the preset memory Preset change button 3 When the radio is on and this button is pressed, the preset sta- tion frequencies are sequentially selected each time the button is pressed; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2 etc.

To listen to a CD To select a desired track Track up button 1 Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.

Track down button 5 Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.

To fast-forward/fast-reverse the disc (Type 1 and Type 2 audio system only) To fast-forward or fast-reverse the disc, press the fast-forward button (1) or the fast-reverse button (5).

Fast-forward button 1 You can fast-forward the disc by pressing the fast-forward but- ton. While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be fast-for- warded.

Fast-reverse button 5 You can fast-reverse the disc by pressing the fast-reverse but- ton. While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be fast- reversed.

To select a desired disc (CD autochanger only) Disc up button 3 Press this button until the desired disc is reached.

To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only) Folder up button 3 Press this button until the desired folder is reached. By giving the button a long push, you can jump to the next disc.

BK0121200US.book 63

5-64

Comfort controls

5

Error codes N00736100722

If an error code (1) appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.

Error display Problem Description Repair No DISC No disc inserted Disc is not in CD player. Insert disc.

E 01 Focus error Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on disc.

Insert disc with label facing up. Remove moisture from disc.

E 02 Disc error Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or excessive vehicle vibration.

Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrations stop.

E 03 Mechanism error Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position.

Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject, bring your vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair.

BK0121200US.book 64

Comfort controls

5-65

5

E HOT High temperature Internal protection against high tempera- tures.

Allow radio to cool by waiting about 30 minutes.

E Com Communication or power supply error

Communication error between external device and audio equipment. Power supply error of external device.

Bring your vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair.

E DC DC offset output voltage

Foreign material is inside of radio or ampli- fier (AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger only).

Bring your vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair.

No magazine (CD changer only)

Disc magazine is not installed in changer unit.

Install magazine. If already installed, eject and reinstall.

Error display Problem Description Repair

BK0121200US.book 65

5-66

Comfort controls

5

Error codes (SIRIUS Satellite Radio) N00736100735

If an error code (1) appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.

Error display Problem Description Repair

ANT Antenna error The antenna may be faulty, not securely con- nected, or open-circuited.

Take the vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

LINKING Cannot pick up sig- nal. The signal is too weak to be received. Move to a place where the signal is easy to

receive. CALL 888-539-SIR-

IUS Unauthorized chan- nel

Contract does not include reception of this channel.

Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio and obtain a contract.

----- (Hyphen)

There is no select- able channel. There is no selectable channel. Cancel SKIP settings.

BK0121200US.book 66

Comfort controls

5-67

5

NOTE Reception may not be possible in a place where the signal is interrupted by a tunnel, by the roof of a garage or other structure,

by woods, or by a tall building. At such times, the audio is muted. This behavior does not indicate a fault. Reception conditions may vary according to the angle of the satellite used for the satellite radio service. Reception may deteriorate if a luggage carrier is attached to the roof or snow collects on the antenna. Satellite radio reception may not be possible in certain regions.

_ _ _ _ _ (Underscore) Channel is invalid

No program is currently being broadcast on this channel; or reception is not possible with this channel.

Consult SIRIUS Satellite Radio at 888-539- SIRIUS.

SAT E Mechanical fault or bad connection

There is a mechanical fault or a bad connec- tion.

Take the vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

OFFAIR OFF AIR This channel is not broadcasting at the present time; or satellite radio broadcasting is suspended.

Check the broadcast times with SIRIUS Sat- ellite Radio.

NOT ACT ID not registered The ID code in the receiver has not been registered with SIRIUS Satellite Radio.

Contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

READ Data reading in progress Reading of received data is in progress. Received data are being read. Please wait.

UPDT Channel data updat- ing in progress

SIRIUS Satellite Radio is presently updating the channel data. Wait until updating is complete.

SUB UPDT Contract status updating complete The contract status has been updated. Press any audio key.

Error display Problem Description Repair

BK0121200US.book 67

5-68

Comfort controls

5

Handling of compact discs N00734100223

Use only the type of compact discs that have the mark shown in the illustration below. (Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs may cause problems.)

The use of special shaped, damaged compact discs (like cracked discs) or low-quality compact discs (like warped discs or burrs on the discs) such as those shown will dam- age the CD player.

BK0121200US.book 68

Comfort controls

5-69

5

In the following circumstances, moisture can form on compact discs and inside the audio system, preventing normal operation. When there is high humidity (for example, when it is

raining). When the temperature suddenly rises, such as right after

the heater is turned on in cold weather.

In this case, wait until the moisture has had time to dry out.

When the CD player is subjected to violent vibrations, such as during off-road driving, the tracking may not work.

When storing compact discs, always store them in their separate cases. Never place compact discs in direct sun- light, or in any place where the temperature or humidity is high.

Never touch the flat surface of the disc where there isnt a label. This will damage the disc surface and could affect the sound quality. When handling a compact disc, always hold it by the outer edge and the center hole.

To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth. Wipe directly from the center hole toward the outer edge. Do not wipe in a circle. Never use any chemicals such as benzine, paint thinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-static agent on the disc.

Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil, etc. to write on the label surface of the disc.

BK0121200US.book 69

5-70

Comfort controls

5

Do not put additional labels (A) or stickers (B) on com- pact discs. Also, do not use any compact disc on which a label or sticker has started to peel off or any compact disc that has stickiness or other contamination left by a peeled- off label or sticker. If you use such a compact disc, the CD player may stop working properly and you may not be able to eject the compact disc.

Notes on CD-Rs/RWs N00751900053

You may have trouble playing back some CD-R/RW discs recorded on CD recorders (CD-R/RW drives), either due to their recording characteristics or dirt, fingerprints, scratches, etc. on the disc surface.

CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high temperatures and high humidity than ordinary music CDs. Leaving them inside a vehicle for extended periods may damage them and make playback impossible.

The unit may not successfully play back a CD-R/RW that was made by the combination of writing software, a CD recorder (CD-R/RW drive) and a disc if they are incom- patible with one another.

This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discs if the session is not closed.

This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs which contain other than CD-DA or MP3 data (Video CD, etc.).

Be sure to observe the handling instructions for the CD- R/RW disc.

WARNING! Operating the CD player in a manner other than

specifically instructed herein may result in hazard- ous radiation exposure. Do not remove the cover and attempt to repair the CD player by yourself. There are no user serviceable parts inside. In case of malfunction, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

BK0121200US.book 70

Comfort controls

5-71

5

Antenna N00734200325

Glass antenna The antenna is embedded in the inner side of the rear window glass.

NOTE When the rear window glass is cleaned, wipe the glass

with a soft cloth by moving the cloth along the antenna so as not to damage it.

Satellite radio antenna (if so equipped) The antenna is located as shown in the illustration.

BK0121200US.book 71

5-72

Comfort controls

5

General information about your radio N00733900266

Your vehicles radio receives both AM and FM stations. The quality of your reception is affected by distance, obstacles, and signal interference.

Signal transmission FM signals do not follow the earth surface nor are they reflected by the upper atmosphere. For this reason, FM broad- casts cannot be received over long distances. AM signals fol- low the earths surface and are reflected by the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM broadcasts can be received over longer distances.

Weak reception (fading) Because of the limited range of FM signals and the way FM waves transmit, you may experience weak or fading FM recep- tion. When the broadcast is blocked by mountains or similar obstructions, reception can be disturbed.

Reflection The reason why one can hear FM but not AM in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that FM signals, unlike AM sig- nals, are reflected by solid objects such as buildings, etc. Because FM signals are easily reflected by buildings, this can also cause reception disturbances. The direct signal from the broadcast station reaches the antenna slightly before the reflected signal. This time difference may cause some reception disturbance or flutter. This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.

FM AM

25 to 40 mile radius (40 to 64 km)

100 mile radius (160 km)

BK0121200US.book 72

Comfort controls

5-73

5

Cross modulation If one listens to a weak station and is in the vicinity of another strong station, both stations might be received simultaneously.

FM stereo reception Stereo reception requires a high quality broadcast signal. This means that types of disturbances mentioned previously become more marked and the reception range is somewhat diminished during stereo reception.

Causes of disturbances FM reception is affected by the electrical systems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially those without an electronic noise sup- pression device. The disturbance is even greater if the station is weak or poorly tuned. FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensitive to electrical disturbances such as power lines, lightning and other types of similar electrical phenomena.

BK0121200US.book 73

BK0121200US.book 74

6

For emergencies

If the vehicle breaks down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 2 Jump-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 2 Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 5 Tools and jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 7 How to change a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 9 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 21 Operation under adverse driving conditions . . . . .6- 23

BK0121200US.book 1

6-2

For emergencies

6

If the vehicle breaks down N00836300174

If your vehicle breaks down on the road, move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane slowly, with the hazard lights flashing, until you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the flashers flashing.

If the engine stops/fails If the engine stops, there will be no power assist to the steering and brakes, making these difficult to use.

The brake booster will not work, so the brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal will be harder to press than usual.

Since there is no power steering assist, the steering wheel will be hard to turn.

When the engine fails at the intersection Get help from your passengers, bystanders, etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe zone.

Jump-starting the engine N00836400696

If the engine cannot be started because the battery is weak or dead, you can start it with the battery from another vehicle using jumper cables.

1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch bands or brace- lets that might make an accidental electrical contact.

2. Position the vehicles close enough together so that the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arent touching each other.

WARNING! When using jumper cables to start a vehicle, follow

the procedures and be very cautious.

CAUTION! Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or tow-

ing. Vehicles with automatic transaxles cannot be started this way. Pushing or towing a vehicle that has a manual transaxle may overheat and damage the catalytic converter. Also, there is more risk of an accident when a vehicle is being pushed or towed.

CAUTION! Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt bat-

tery. If the other system isnt 12-volt, both systems can be damaged.

BK0121200US.book 2

For emergencies

6-3

6

3. You could be injured if the vehicles move. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transaxle in P (PARK) or a manual transaxle in N (Neutral). Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position.

NOTE Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical loads. This

will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. 4. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at the proper level.

(Refer to Battery on page 7-15.)

5. Connect one end of one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery (A), and the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery (B).

NOTE Open the terminal cover before connecting the jumper

cable to the positive terminal of the battery. (Refer to Battery on page 7-15.)

Use the proper cables suitable for the battery size. Otherwise heat damage to the cables could result.

Check the jumper cables for damage and corrosion before use.

WARNING! Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position on

both vehicles. Make sure that the cables or your clothes cannot be caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal injury could result.

WARNING! If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or looks frozen,

DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP STARTING!! The battery might split open or explode if the tem- perature is below the freezing point or if it is not filled to the proper level.

BK0121200US.book 3

6-4

For emergencies

6

6. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery (B), and the other end to the engine block of the vehicle with the low battery (A) at the point farthest from the battery.

7. Start the engine in the vehicle providing the boost. Let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the low battery.

8. After the engine is started, disconnect the cables in the reverse order from the way you connected them.

WARNING! Be sure to follow the proper order when connecting

the batteries, of: . Make sure that the connection is made to the

engine properly. If the connection is directly made to the negative side of the battery, the flammable gases from inside the battery might catch fire and explode, causing personal injury.

When connecting the jumper cable, do not connect the positive (+) cable to the negative (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks can make the battery explode.

CAUTION! Make sure that the jumper cable will not be caught

in the cooling fan or other moving parts in the engine compartment.

WARNING! Charging your battery while it is still in your vehicle

might cause the battery to catch fire and explode. If you have to charge it while in the vehicle, disconnect the negative terminal.

Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away from the battery because the battery may explode.

Keep your work area well vented when charging or using the battery in an enclosed space.

Remove all the caps before charging the battery. Electrolyte (battery acid) is corrosive diluted sul-

phuric acid. If electrolyte comes in contact with your hands, eyes, clothes, or the painted surface of your vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them immediately and thor- oughly with water, and get prompt medical atten- tion.

Always wear protective clothing and goggles when working near the battery.

Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

BK0121200US.book 4

For emergencies

6-5

6

Low battery charge If you drive your vehicle with a low battery charge after the engine has been started by using jumper cables, the engine may misfire. This can cause the anti-lock braking system warning light to blink on and off. This is only due to the low battery voltage. It is not a problem with the brake system. If this hap- pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the charging system is operating properly.

Engine overheating N00836500222

If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator moves to the H (hot) position (red zone), the engine may be overheated. If this happens:

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on the hazard warn- ing flashers.

2. With the engine still running, carefully raise the engine hood to vent the engine compartment.

3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If the fan is not turning, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.

4. If you see steam or spray coming from under the hood, turn off the engine.

WARNING! To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair, jewelry

and clothes away from the cooling fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.

BK0121200US.book 5

6-6

For emergencies

6

5. If you do not see steam or spray coming from under the hood, leave the engine on until the temperature indicator on the instrument panel moves below the red zone. When it is in the middle of the normal zone, you can start driving again. If the indicator stays in the red zone, turn off the engine.

6. When you do not see any more steam or spray, open the hood. Look for obvious leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be careful as components will be hot. Any leak source must be repaired.

7. If there is no obvious leak source, check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too low, slowly add coolant.

8. If the reserve tank needs coolant, you will probably also need to add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen or remove the radiator cap until the engine has cooled down.

WARNING! Before raising the engine hood, check to see if there

is steam or spray coming from under the hood. Steam or spray coming from an overheated engine could seriously scald you. Do not open the hood until there is no steam or spray.

WARNING! Removing the radiator cap could scald you with

escaping hot water or steam. When checking the radiator level, cover the cap with a cloth before try- ing to remove it. Turn it slowly counterclockwise, without pressing down, to the first notch. The pres- sure in the system will then be let out. When the pressure is COMPLETELY LET OUT, press down and keep turning the cap counterclockwise until it will come off.

BK0121200US.book 6

For emergencies

6-7

6

9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant, up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use plain water if you have to (and replace it with the right coolant as soon as possible).

10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it fully. Check the temperature indicator. You can drive when the indicator returns to the normal zone.

11. Have your vehicle checked by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Tools and jack N00836600308

Storage The tools and the jack are stowed in the trunk. Before removing the tools and the jack, lift up the luggage floor board.

1- Tools 2- Jack 3- Jack storage box

BK0121200US.book 7

6-8

For emergencies

6

Tools N00832600153

Jack N00832700226

To store Retract the jack, then return it to its original position.

1- Bar 2- Wheel nut wrench

To retract

To expand

BK0121200US.book 8

For emergencies

6-9

6

How to change a tire N00836900806

Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle in a safe, flat location.

1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground. 2. Set the parking brake firmly, move the selector lever to

the P (PARK) position. 3. Turn on the hazard flashers and turn the ignition key to the

LOCK position. 4. Set up a warning triangle, flashing signal light, etc., at an

adequate distance from the vehicle, and have all your pas- sengers leave the vehicle.

5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is raised on the jack, place chocks or blocks (A) at the tire that is diago- nally opposite from the tire (B) you are changing.

WARNING! Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the correct tire

when jacking up the vehicle. If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the jack could slip out of position, leading to an accident.

BK0121200US.book 9

6-10

For emergencies

6

NOTE The chocks shown in the illustration do not come with

your vehicle. It is recommended that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep them in the vehicle for use if needed.

If chocks or blocks are not available, use stones or any other objects that are large enough to hold the wheel in position.

6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench ready. Refer to Tools and jack on page 6-7.

Spare tire information N00849600243

Compact spare tire The compact spare tire is designed to save space in the trunk. Its lighter weight makes it easier to use if a flat tire occurs.

WARNING! Tires, including spare tire, degrade over time with

age even when they are not being used. It is recom- mended that tires over 6 years generally be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

CAUTION! While the compact spare tire is stowed, the inflation

pressure should be checked at least once a month to assure that it remains at the recommended inflation pressure. See the tire and loading information plac- ard attached to the drivers door sill. Refer to Tire and loading information placard on page 9-3.

Driving with an improperly inflated tire can cause an accident. If you have no choice but to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep your speed down and avoid sudden steering or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to Tire inflation pressures on page 7-23.

The compact spare tire should be used only tempo- rarily. While the compact spare tire is being used, the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly. Have the tire replaced or repaired at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

If your vehicle has aluminum type wheels, you can use the same wheel nuts on the compact spare tire wheel.

Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving with the compact spare tire.

Avoid fast starting and braking when driving with the compact spare tire.

Do not drive through automatic car washes and over obstacles that could possibly damage the underside of your vehicle. Because the compact spare tire is smaller than the original tire, there is less clearance between the ground and your vehicle.

Because the compact spare tire is designed only for your vehicle, do not use it on any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

BK0121200US.book 10

For emergencies

6-11

6

To remove the spare tire N00849700202

1. Lift up the luggage floor board. 2. Remove the jack storage box. 3. To remove the spare tire, remove the installation clamp

(A) by turning it counterclockwise.

NOTE The clamp cannot be used when a normal tire is stowed.

Do not put the compact spare tire on a different wheel, and do not put standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could damage these parts or other parts on your vehicle.

CAUTION!

BK0121200US.book 11

6-12

For emergencies

6

NOTE Put the spare tire under the vehicle body near the jack.

This makes it safer if the jack slips out of position.

To change a tire N00849800317

1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first remove the covers (refer to Wheel covers on page 6-19). Then loosen the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.

BK0121200US.book 12

For emergencies

6-13

6

2. Place the jack under one of the jacking points (A) shown in the illustration. Use the jacking point closest to the tire you wish to change.

3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top of the jack.

WARNING! Set the jack only at the positions shown here. If the

jack is set at a wrong position, it could dent your vehicle or the jack might fall over and cause per- sonal injury.

Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft surface. Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause personal injury. Always use the jack on a flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack, make sure there are no sand or pebbles under the jack base.

BK0121200US.book 13

6-14

For emergencies

6

4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar into the shafts jack end, as shown in the illustration. Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until the tire is raised slightly off the ground surface.

5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench, then take the wheel off.

WARNING! Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the tire is

raised off the ground. It is dangerous to raise the vehicle any higher.

Do not get under your vehicle while using the jack. Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it sitting on

the jack for a long time. Both are very dangerous. Do not use a jack except the one that came with your

vehicle. The jack should not be used for any purpose other

than to change a tire.

No one should be in your vehicle when using the jack.

Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is on the jack.

Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires that are still on the ground could turn and make your vehicle fall off the jack.

CAUTION! Handle the wheel carefully when changing the tire,

to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

WARNING!

BK0121200US.book 14

For emergencies

6-15

6

6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub surface (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installation holes (H) in the wheel, and then mount the spare tire.

WARNING! Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem (I) facing

outboard. If you cannot see the valve stem (I), you have installed the wheel backwards. Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel installed backwards can cause vehicle damage and result in an accident.

BK0121200US.book 15

6-16

For emergencies

6

7. [Vehicle with steel wheels] Install the wheel nuts (tapered nuts) with their tapered ends facing inward, then tighten by hand until the wheel is no longer loose.

[Vehicle with aluminum wheels] Normal wheels

Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts (flange nuts) until their flange section comes in contact with the wheel and it is no longer loose.

Steel wheels (Normal wheels and compact spare wheel) Normal wheels

BK0121200US.book 16

For emergencies

6-17

6

Compact spare wheel Install the wheel nuts with their tapered ends facing inward, then tighten by hand until the wheel is no longer loose.

NOTE Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the compact spare

or steel wheel, but return them to the original wheel and tire as soon as possible.

If all four wheels are changed to steel wheels, use tapered nuts.

8. Lower the vehicle slowly by rotating the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise until the tire touches the ground.

CAUTION! Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or the nuts

or they will tighten too much.

Compact spare wheel

BK0121200US.book 17

6-18

For emergencies

6

9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the illustration until each nut has been tightened to the torque listed here. 88 to 108 Nm (65 to 80 ft-lb)

10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.

11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The recommended tire pressure for your vehicle is listed on the tire and loading information placard attached to the drivers door sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to Tire inflation pres- sures on page 7-23.

CAUTION! Never use your foot or a pipe extension to apply

added force to the wheel nut wrench when tighten- ing the wheel nuts. If you do so, you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts.

A- Vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada (Type 1) B- Vehicles sold in Canada (Type 2)

BK0121200US.book 18

For emergencies

6-19

6

To store the flat tire or spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nut wrench

N00850000058

Reverse the removing procedure when storing the flat tire or spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nut wrench. Refer to To remove the spare tire on page 6-11.

Wheel covers (if so equipped) N00849400111

To remove

Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it deeply into the notch provided in the wheel cover, and pry the cover away from the wheel. Using the same procedure at the other wheel cover notches, work the wheel cover away from the wheel to remove it com- pletely.

CAUTION! While the compact spare tire is stowed, the inflation

pressure should be checked at least once a month to assure that it remains at the recommended inflation pressure. See the tire and loading information plac- ard attached to the drivers door sill. Refer to Tire and loading information placard on page 9-3.

Driving with an improperly inflated tire can cause an accident. If you have no choice but to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep your speed down and avoid sudden steering or braking. Inflate the tire to the correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to Tire inflation pressures on page 7-23.

The compact spare tire should only be used tempo- rarily. When the compact spare tire is used, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work properly. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible to replace or repair the original tire.

After changing the tire and driving the vehicle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the wheel nuts to make sure that they have not come loose.

If the steering wheel vibrates when driving after changing the tire, have the tire checked for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Do not mix one type of tire with another or use a dif- ferent size from the one listed. This would cause early wear and poor handling.

BK0121200US.book 19

6-20

For emergencies

6

NOTE The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be careful when pry-

ing it off.

To install

Line up the air valve (A) with the valve opening (B) on the wheel cover. Then use your hand to strike around the outer edge of the wheel cover to secure it in place.

NOTE The full wheel cover is marked with a symbol (C) on the

reverse side that shows the air valve location. Before installing the wheel cover to the wheel, make sure that the opening with the symbol mark (C) is correctly aligned with the air valve.

CAUTION! Trying to remove the wheel cover with only your

bare hands can seriously injure your fingers.

BK0121200US.book 20

For emergencies

6-21

6

Towing N00837000774

If your vehicle needs to be towed If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by a commercial tow truck service. When towing is required, transport the vehicle using a tow truck. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle.

There may be local regulations concerning towing in your area. Obey the regulations of the area where you are driving your vehicle.

CAUTION! Do not attempt to be towed by another vehicle with

a rope.

BK0121200US.book 21

6-22

For emergencies

6

Towing the vehicle by a tow truck Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type B) Place the selector lever in the N (NEUTRAL) position. Turn the ignition key to the ACC position and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or tie- down strap. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK posi- tion when towing.

Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type C) Release the parking brake. Place the selector lever in the N (NEUTRAL) position.

CAUTION! This vehicle must not be towed by a tow truck using

sling lift type equipment (Type A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will damage the bumper and front end.

If the engine or transaxle is malfunctioning or dam- aged, transport the vehicle with the driving wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as illustrated.

If the vehicle is towed with the ignition key in the ON position and only the front wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the ground, the ASC may operate, resulting in an accident. When towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep the igni- tion key in the LOCK or ACC position. When towing the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, keep the ignition key in the ACC position.

If you tow the vehicles with an automatic transaxle with the driving wheels on the ground (Type B) as illustrated, make sure that the towing speed and dis- tance given below are never exceeded, causing the transaxle damage. Towing speed: 31 mph (50 km/h) Towing distance: 18 miles (30 km)

For the towing speed and the towing distance, follow the local driving laws and regulations.

WARNING! To prevent entry of exhaust gas from the towing

vehicle, set the selection switch to the recirculation position.

BK0121200US.book 22

For emergencies

6-23

6

Operation under adverse driving conditions N00837200688

If your vehicle becomes stuck in sand, mud or snow If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the selector lever rhythmically between Sports mode and R (REVERSE) position, while pressing lightly on the accelerator pedal. Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels. Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can cause overheating and transaxle fail- ure. Let the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the transaxle before trying again. If your vehicle is still stuck after several rocking attempts, call for a commercial tow truck service.

On wet roads

WARNING! When trying to rock your vehicle out of a stuck posi-

tion, make sure that there are no people nearby. The rocking motion can make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward or backward, and injure any bystanders.

CAUTION! Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper than it

looks, and you could be seriously hurt by driving into flood water.

When driving in rain, on water-covered roads, or through a car wash, water could get into the brake discs and make them fail temporarily. In such cases, lightly press the brake pedal to see if they are work- ing properly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly several times while driving to dry the brake pads, then check them again.

When driving in rain, a layer of water may form between the tires and the road surface (aquaplan- ing). This loosens your tires grip on the road, mak- ing it difficult to steer or brake properly. When driving on a wet road: Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. Do not drive on worn tires. Always keep the tires at the correct inflation pres-

sures.

BK0121200US.book 23

6-24

For emergencies

6

On snowy or icy roads When driving on a road covered with snow or ice, use

snow tires. Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. There may be state or local regulations about using snow tires. Always check the regulations in your local area before using them. Refer to the section entitled Snow tires on page 7-27 and Tire chains on page 7-27.

Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the brakes.

Allow extra distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you, and avoid sudden braking.

If a skid occurs when the accelerator pedal is depressed, take your foot off the pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the skid.

Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). Hold the brake pedal down firmly and keep it depressed. Do not pump the brake pedal which will result in reduced braking performance.

After parking on snowy or icy road, it may be difficult to move your vehicle due to freeze-up of the brake. Depress the accelerator pedal little by little to move the vehicle after confirming safety of the vehicle.

On a bumpy or rutted road Drive as slow as possible when driving on bumpy or rut-

ted roads or over potholes etc.

CAUTION! Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly. The

vehicle could start moving when it breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in an accident.

CAUTION! Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes can

damage the tires and wheels. Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-inflated tires are especially at risk for damage.

The vehicles body, bumper, muffler and other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is driven over a step (for example, at the entrance or

exit of a parking lot); parked too closely against a curb or parking block,

or by the side of a road with curbstones; driven on a steep slope;

BK0121200US.book 24

7

Vehicle care and maintenance

Service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 2 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 3 Engine hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 4 View of the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 6 Engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 6 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 9 Air cleaner filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 11 Automatic transaxle fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 12 Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 13 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 14 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 15 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 15 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 19 Brake pedal free play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 28 Parking brake lever stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 28 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 29 Emission-control system maintenance. . . . . . . . . .7- 29 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 31 For cold and snowy weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 34 Fuse links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 34 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7- 35

Replacement of light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 44 Vehicle care precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 61 Cleaning the inside of your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 62 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . 7- 63

BK0121200US.book 1

7-2

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Service precautions N00937300156

Taking regular care of your vehicle will preserve its value and appearance as long as possible.

You can do some of the maintenance work yourself, and the rest should only be performed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. If you discover a malfunction or other problem, have it cor- rected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. This section describes the maintenance inspections that you can do yourself, if you so desire. Follow the instructions and precautions for each procedure.

Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors Diamond Care Pro- tection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warran- ties. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.

WARNING! When checking or servicing the inside of the engine

compartment, be sure the engine is stopped and has had a chance to cool down.

If you need to work in the engine compartment with the engine running, be especially careful that your clothing, hair, etc. does not get caught in the fan, drive belts, or other moving parts.

The fan can turn on automatically even if the engine is not running. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key to be safe while you work in the engine compartment.

Do not smoke or allow open flames around fuel or the battery. The fumes are flammable.

Be extremely careful when working around the bat- tery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Do not get under your vehicle while it is on a jack. Always use properly rated automotive jack stands.

Handling your vehicles parts and materials in the wrong way can injure you. Ask an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice if you have questions.

WARNING!

BK0121200US.book 2

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-3

7

Catalytic converter N00937400333

The catalytic converter requires you to use unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the emission-control effective- ness of the converter.

Normally, the catalytic converter does not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned for the converter to continue to work properly.

To reduce the possibility of catalytic converter damage: Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of the type of rec-

ommended in Fuel selection. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level. Running

out of gas could damage the catalytic converter. Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires discon-

nected or removed, such as when performing diagnostic tests.

Do not idle the engine for a long time if it is idling roughly or otherwise obviously malfunctioning.

To prevent the catalytic converter from being damaged from unburned gas, do not race the engine when turning off the ignition switch.

Stop driving the vehicle if you think the performance is noticeably low, or the engine has a malfunction. If you are not able to stop driving immediately, slow down and drive for only a short time. Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

In unusual situations involving major engine problems, a burning odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalytic converter overheating. If this occurs, stop in a safe place, shut the engine off and let the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool, immediately take your vehicle to a dealer or a repair facility of your choice for service.

CAUTION! Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. If the engine malfunctions or misfires, or if your vehi- cle performance suffers, have it serviced promptly. Running your vehicle when it is overheated may result in damage to the converter and vehicle.

WARNING! Do not park or run your vehicle in areas where com-

bustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.

Do not put undercoat paint on the catalytic con- verter.

BK0121200US.book 3

7-4

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Engine hood N00937500480

To open Use the engine hood release lever (located under the instrument panel near the drivers door) to unlock the engine hood.

Pull the lever toward you to release the engine hood latch.

Release the safety lever and lift the engine hood.

NOTE To prevent damage to the engine hood and wipers, make

sure the wipers are at resting position when you open the engine hood.

WARNING! Never use the release lever to unlatch the engine

hood while the vehicle is in motion. Do not drive your vehicle unless the engine hood is

locked.

BK0121200US.book 4

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-5

7

Support the engine hood with the hood prop. Insert the hood prop securely in the opening under the hood marked with an arrow.

To close Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and put it back in its retainer.

Slowly lower the engine hood about 8 inches (20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight.

NOTE If this does not close the engine hood properly, drop it

again from a slightly higher position. Do not push down strongly on the engine hood. Depend-

ing on how strongly or where you push down, you could create a dent in the vehicle body.

CAUTION! Always insert the support prop into the hole spe-

cially made for it. Propping the engine hood at any other place could cause the prop to slip out and lead to an accident.

The hood prop can fall out if the hood is lifted by a strong wind.

CAUTION! Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers when

closing the engine hood.

BK0121200US.book 5

7-6

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

View of the engine compartment N00937600612

Engine oil and oil filter N00937700815

To check and refill engine oil It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may need to add oil between the recommended oil change intervals. Before starting the engine, check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.

To check the oil level, remove the dipstick, wipe it off, and gently insert it all the way into the crankcase. Slowly remove it again. The oil level must not go above the line on the dipstick.

If the level does not reach the line, which shows the smallest amount of oil required, remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve cover, and fill to within the Good range.

1- Power steering fluid reservoir 2- Brake fluid 3- Battery 4- Windshield washer fluid reservoir 5- Engine oil level dipstick 6- Radiator cap 7- Engine oil filler cap 8- Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick 9- Engine coolant reservoir

10- Air cleaner filter

Good

BK0121200US.book 6

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-7

7

NOTE Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced by payload,

engine speed, etc. The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the vehicle is

subjected to severe conditions (for example, repeated operation on rough roads, in mountainous regions, on roads with many uphill and downhill gradients, or over short distances). Consequently, the oil will require earlier replacement in accordance with the schedule in the WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.

Engine oil identification mark Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only engine oils with the ILSAC certification symbol on the front of the container.

CAUTION! Overfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration and

loss of oil pressure, which could damage the engine.

WARNING! Used engine oil is poisonous, and can damage your

skin. Prolonged and repeated contact may cause serious skin disorders, including dermatitis and can- cer. Dont let used oil touch your skin. Wash thor- oughly after working with it.

Keep used oil out of the reach of children.

ILSAC certification symbol

BK0121200US.book 7

7-8

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certification symbol, use an API classification SM or higher oil with the following label. This mark appears on the top of the oil container and tells you two important things about the oil.

Recommended engine oil viscosity Use engine oil with the proper thickness for the outdoor tem- peratures where you will be driving.

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is strongly recommended for optimum fuel economy and cold starting.

1- The top portion shows the quality of the oil. 2- The center portion shows the SAE grade of the oil viscosity.

API service symbol

BK0121200US.book 8

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-9

7

To replace the oil filter The oil filter should be replaced at the time or mileage speci- fied in the WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN- UAL. Only use high quality replacement filters on this vehicle. The manufacturers specifications for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters require that the filter can withstand a pressure of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi oil filter is the best replace- ment filter. Follow the installation instructions printed on the filter.

Engine coolant N00937800395

To check the coolant level The coolant reserve system provides a quick visual method for determining the coolant level. When the engine is cold, the level of the coolant in the reserve tank should be between the F (FULL) and L (LOW) marks. The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radi- ator cap except for checking the coolant freeze point or replac- ing the antifreeze coolant.

CAUTION! Take care not to bend the oil filter cover when

replacing the oil filter.

BK0121200US.book 9

7-10

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

To add coolant Use Mitsubishi Genuine Coolant or an equivalent. Mitsubishi Genuine Coolant provides excellent protection against corrosion and rust formation on all metals, including aluminum, and prevents blockages in the radiator, heater, cyl- inder head, engine block, etc. If you need to add coolant often, or if the level in the reserve tank does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for testing.

Radiator cap The radiator cap must be tight sealed to prevent losing coolant which may result in engine damage. Only use a Genuine Mitsubishi Parts radiator cap, or an approved equivalent.

Points to remember Do not overfill the reserve tank. Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap that stays sealed

and lets the coolant flow from the reserve tank back to the radiator when the engine cools down. If you need to change the cap, use the exact same kind.

Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator with the proper gauge, and only when it is safe. If you add anti- freeze, the contents of the reserve tank must be protected against freezing.

Keep the front of the radiator and condenser clean.

CAUTION! Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any

engine coolants that contain them. Using the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum parts.

When you need to add coolant to the reserve tank, use at least a 50 % concentration of ethylene-glycol antifreeze in water. Do not overfill. Use a higher con- centration (not over 60 %) when the outside temper- ature is -31 F (-35 C) or lower. When the engine is working very hard (for example, during mountain driving and/or when the outside temperature is high), use a 50 % concentration. You can check the concentration level with a gauge from an automotive supply store, or your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or service station can check it for you. Use only high quality ethylene-glycol antifreeze coolant that is made to prevent corrosion of all cooling sys- tem metals.

Do not top off the tank with plain water only. Water by itself boils at a lower temperature and does not stop rust or freezing. If the water freezes, it will damage your cooling system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause corrosion and rust.

WARNING! Wait for the engine to cool down before opening the

radiator cap. Otherwise hot steam or boiling coolant could spray up from the radiator and scald you.

CAUTION!

BK0121200US.book 10

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-11

7

If the temperature of the engine coolant does not rise after the engine is warmed-up, take your vehicle to an autho- rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to have the thermostat checked, and replaced if necessary.

Air cleaner filter N00937900370

The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty from use and not filter properly. Replace it with a new filter using the schedule in the WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.

Unclamp and take out the air cleaner filter.

After replacing the air cleaner filter, put the cover back on in its original position.

NOTE Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recommended when

replacing the air cleaner filter.

CAUTION! Take care not to scratch the engine air flow sensor

when removing the air cleaner cover.

BK0121200US.book 11

7-12

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Automatic transaxle fluid N00938000538

The automatic transaxle should be maintained and serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to obtain the best performance and longest life. It is important that the transaxle fluid is kept at the correct level.

To check the fluid level The fluid level should be checked when the engine temperature gauge shows the engine is warmed up and the fluid in the transaxle is heated to its normal working temperature. Driving with the wrong fluid level will rapidly wear out the transaxle and destroy the fluid.

Procedure for checking the fluid level 1. With the brake pedal fully depressed and the engine

idling, select each gear momentarily, ending with the selector lever in the P (PARK) position.

2. The fluid level should be at the HOT mark, but never above the HOT mark when the engine is warmed up. Add or drain fluid to get to the correct level.

3. Make certain that the dipstick cap is installed properly to keep dirt and water out of the transaxle.

WARNING! Transaxle fluid is extremely flammable and poison-

ous. Do not spill fluid when adding or draining.

BK0121200US.book 12

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-13

7

Fluid type Use only DIAMOND ATF SP III transaxle fluid to ensure optimum transaxle performance.

Special additives Mitsubishi Motors Corporation does not recommend the addi- tion of any fluid additives to the transaxle.

Washer fluid N00938600286

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is in the engine compart- ment. Check the washer fluid level at regular intervals and add washer fluid to reservoir if necessary.

During cold weather When freezing weather is anticipated, flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield antifreeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.

BK0121200US.book 13

7-14

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Brake fluid N00938800347

To check the fluid level The brake fluid level must be between the MAX and MIN marks on the reservoir.

The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brake pads, but this does not indicate any abnormality. If the brake fluid level falls markedly in a short length of time, it indicates leaks from the brake system. If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Fluid type Use brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly sealed to keep dirt and water out.

CAUTION! Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, mix

with, or get into the brake fluid. This will damage the seals.

Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can damage painted surfaces.

Use only the listed brake fluid. Different brands of brake fluid have different additives, and these can cause a chemical reaction. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.

Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep the brake fluid from evaporating.

BK0121200US.book 14

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-15

7

Power steering fluid N00939000320

To check the fluid level Check the fluid level in the reservoir while the engine is idling. Check to make certain that the power steering fluid level is always between the MAX and MIN level markings on the fluid reservoir and refill the fluid, if necessary.

Fluid type

Battery N00939100868

The condition of the battery is very important for quick starting and to keep the vehicles electrical system working properly. Check the battery regularly.

If battery performance is suspect, have the battery and charging system tested by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

NOTE After replacing the battery, the electronic control system

data for the automatic transaxle, etc., will be erased. As a result, shifting may be rough. Shifting will become smoother after several changes in speed.

Lubricant Genuine Mitsubishi Power Steering Fluid

BK0121200US.book 15

7-16

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Checking battery electrolyte level Use the following procedure to check the battery electrolyte level.

1. Insert the tip of a screwdriver at the edge of the cap, pry gently to remove the cap.

2. The inside of the battery is divided into several compart- ments. Check the electrolyte level (A) in each cell. The electrolyte level must be within the range (B) shown in the illustration. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water. Do not overfill above the top of the range because a spill dur- ing driving could cause damage.

WARNING! If the battery goes flat, be sure to check the battery

electrolyte level before connecting booster cables. After checking the battery electrolyte level, make

sure the caps are fitted securely. If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace the battery.

Cell

A

B = .31 in (8 mm)

BK0121200US.book 16

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-17

7

During cold weather The battery is weaker in cold temperatures. This has to do with its chemical and physical properties and is why a very cold bat- tery, especially one with a low charge, will have a hard time starting your vehicle. It is recommended that you have your battery and charging sys- tem checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice before the start of cold weather. If necessary, have it charged. This will guarantee more reliable starting, and longer battery life.

Disconnection and connection To disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal first, then the positive (+) terminal. To reconnect the battery, first connect the positive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, before starting the vehicle.

NOTE Open the terminal cover (A) before disconnecting or con-

necting the positive (+) terminal of the battery.

BK0121200US.book 17

7-18

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

NOTE Check each battery terminal for corrosion. You can stop

more corrosion by washing with a solution of baking soda and water. Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or tightening them.

Check to see that the battery is securely installed and can- not be moved. Also check each terminal for tightness.

If you will not be driving your vehicle for a long period of time, remove the battery and store it in a place where the battery fluid will not freeze. The battery only should be stored with a full charge.

WARNING! Never disconnect the battery while the engine is run-

ning, or you could damage the vehicles electrical parts.

Never short-circuit the battery. This could cause it to overheat and be damaged.

Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from the battery because the battery could explode.

Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corrosive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or discolor them. And if it gets on your skin or in your eyes, it can cause burns or blindness. Please observe the following handling instructions: If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or other nearby

parts, wipe it off with a soft cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of water and neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water.

If electrolyte gets on your hands or clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them with water immediately and get immediate medical attention.

Open doors and windows in any closed space where you may be charging or working with the battery.

Always wear protective clothing and goggles when working with the battery, or have a skilled automo- bile technician do it.

If you are quick-charging your battery, first discon- nect the battery cables.

In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure to discon- nect the negative (-) terminal first, and reconnect it last.

If the electrolyte level is very low, have the battery checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Battery terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after han- dling.

WARNING!

BK0121200US.book 18

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-19

7

Tires N00939200537

It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms: Cold tire pressure:

The measured pressure after the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or

The measured pressure when the vehicle is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after having been parked for three hours.

Maximum inflation pressure: the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.

Recommended inflation pressure: the inflation pressure for optimum tire performance.

Intended outboard sidewall: The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white let-

tering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 pounds or less.

Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or mul- tipurpose passenger vehicles.

Tread: portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Tread rib: a tread section running circumferentially around a tire.

Tread separation: pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass.

Carcass: the tire structure, except tread and sidewall rub- ber which, when inflated, bears the load.

Sidewall: portion of a tire between the tread and bead. Section width: the linear distance between the exteriors of

the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands.

Bead: the part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.

Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.

WARNING! Driving with tires that are worn, damaged or

improperly inflated is dangerous. These type tire conditions will adversely affect vehi- cle performance. These type tire conditions can also cause a tread sep- aration or blowout which may result in an accident causing serious injury or death.

Tires, including spare tire, degrade over time with age even when they are not being used. It is recom- mended that tires over 6 years generally be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

BK0121200US.book 19

7-20

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Cord: the strands forming the plies in the tire. Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly

upon which the tire beads are seated. Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the bead seat. Groove: the space between two adjacent tread ribs.

Tire Markings

BK0121200US.book 20

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-21

7

Size Designation

EXAMPLE:P215/65R15

NOTE European/Japanese metric tire sizing is based on

European/Japanese design standards. Tires designed to these standards have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire size designation. Exam- ple: 215/65R15 96H.

LT (Light Truck) -metric tire sizing is based on U.S.A. design standards. The size designation for LT-metric tires is the same as for P-metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

Service Description

EXAMPLE: 95H

Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.

P Passenger car tire size based on U.S.A. design standards

215 Section width in millimeters (MM.)

65 Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire.

R Construction code R means radial construction. D means diagonal or bias construction.

15 Rim diameter in inches (in)

95 Load index A numerical code associated with the maxi- mum load a tire can carry.

H

Speed symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating condi- tions. The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pres- sure, vehicle loading, road conditions and posted speed limits)

WARNING! Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Over-

loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

BK0121200US.book 21

7-22

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire but the date code may only be on one side. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 1504

Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative perfor- mance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pave- ment as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, represent- ing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tempera- ture can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire fail- ure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

DOT

Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compli- ance with the U.S. Department of Transporta- tion tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use.

MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)

L9 ABCD

Code representing the tire size. (2 digits) Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)

15 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)

04 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)

BK0121200US.book 22

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-23

7

Tire inflation pressures N00939300798

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for the safe and satis- factory operation of your vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause problems in three major areas:

Safety Too little pressure increases flexing in the tire and can cause tire failure. Too much pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and potholes could then cause tire damage that may result in tire failure.

Economy The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven wear patterns in the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce the tread life, and the tire will have to be replaced sooner. Too little pressure also makes it harder for the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.

Ride comfort and vehicle stability The superior riding experience built into your vehicle partly depends on the correct tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too lit- tle pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to respond. Unequal tire pressures can make steering your vehicle uneven and unpredictable.

The correct tire pressure for your vehicle is listed on the plac- ard attached to the sill of the drivers door. (Refer to Tire and loading information placard on page 9-3.)

The recommended inflation pressures should be used for the tires listed below.

Tire pressures should be checked, and adjusted if necessary, at least once a month. Pressures should be checked more often whenever weather temperatures change severely, because tire pressures change with outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed are always cold inflation pressure. Cold inflation pressure is measured after the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after having been parked for three hours. Cold inflation pressure must not go above the maximum values molded into the tire sidewall. After driving several miles, your tire inflation pressure may increase 14 to 41 KPA, 2 to 6 PSI from the cold inflation pressure. Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the specified cold pressure, or your tire pressure will be too low. Check your tires each time you refuel. If one tire looks lower than the others, check the pressure for all of them. You should also take the following safety precautions:

Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures. (See the tire and loading information placard attached to the sill of the drivers door.)

Stay within the recommended load limits. Make sure that the weight of any load in your vehicle is

evenly distributed.

Item Tire size Front Rear

Normal tire P215/60R16 P235/45R18

220 KPA, 32 PSI

220 KPA, 32 PSI

Compact spare tire T125/70D16 420 KPA, 60 PSI

BK0121200US.book 23

7-24

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Drive at safe speeds. After filling your tires to the correct pressure, check them

for damage and air leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the valve stems.

Replacing tires and wheels N00939600313

Tire maintenance N00939700037

The following maintenance steps are recommended: Check tire pressures regularly. Have regular maintenance done on the wheel balance and

front and rear suspension alignment. Rotate your tires regularly as described in the Tire rota-

tion section on page 7-25.

CAUTION! Avoid using different size tires from the one listed

and the combined use of different types of tires, as this can affect driving safety. Refer to Tires and wheels on page 9-7.

Even if a wheel has the same rim size and offset as the specified type of wheel, its shape may prevent it from being fitted correctly. Consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice before using wheels that you have.

Only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels should be used, because your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system. Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks and sensor damage, as it will not be possible to install the tire pressure sensor properly.

BK0121200US.book 24

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-25

7

Tread wear indicators N00939800171

Tread wear indicators are built into the original equipment tires on your vehicle to help you know when your tires should be replaced. Many states have laws requiring that you replace your tires at this point. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear when the tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). When the bands appear next to one another in two or more places, replace your tires.

NOTE Tire wear indicators can have different marks and loca-

tions depending on the tire manufacturer.

Tire rotation N00939900420

To even out the wear on your tires and make them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corporation recommends that you rotate your tires at the mileage listed in the WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL. However, the timing for tire rotation may vary according to your vehicle condition, road surface conditions, and your own personal driving habits. Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear, damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pressure, wheels that are not aligned properly, wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe braking. Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to find out the reason for uneven tread wear.

The first tire rotation is the most important one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.

1- Location of the tread wear indicator 2- Tread wear indicator

BK0121200US.book 25

7-26

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

CAUTION! A compact spare tire can be fitted temporarily in

place of a tire that has been removed during the tire rotation. However, it must not be included in the regular tire rotation sequence.

Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation direction

Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction

Front

Front

CAUTION! If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the correct

direction of rotation, swap the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle and the front and rear tires on the right-hand side of the vehicle sepa- rately. Keep each tire on its original side of the vehi- cle. When installing the tires, make sure the arrows point in the direction in which the wheels will turn when the vehicle moves forward. Any tire whose arrow points in the wrong direction will not perform to its full potential.

BK0121200US.book 26

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-27

7

Snow tires N00940000359

In some areas of the country, snow tires are required for winter driving. If snow tires are required in your area, you must choose snow tires of the same size and type as the original tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires should also be installed on all four wheels. Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling can be reduced. Even where laws may permit it, snow tires should not be oper- ated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).

Tire chains N00940100015

CAUTION! Avoid the combined use of different types of tires.

Using different types of tires can affect vehicle per- formance and safety.

Front

CAUTION! If flange nuts are used on your vehicle, change to

tapered nuts when using snow tires with steel wheels.

Only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels should be used, because your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system. Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks and sensor damage, as it will not be possible to install the tire pressure sensor properly.

CAUTION! Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. The

clearance between the chains and the body is not sufficient to allow proper clearance, and the vehicle body might be damaged.

BK0121200US.book 27

7-28

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Brake pedal free play N00940300235

To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn off the engine and press the brake pedal several times with your foot. Then press the pedal down with your fingers until you first feel resistance.

Brake pedal free play: .1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)

If the free play is not within these limits, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for adjustment.

Parking brake lever stroke N00940400177

Check the parking brake lever travel occasionally. To check this, pull the lever up slowly and count the number of clicks of the ratchet.

Parking brake lever stroke 5 to 7 notches

Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by the ratchet after pulling.

WARNING! Continued operation of the vehicle with the parking

brake lever out of adjustment may result in the vehi- cle moving when unattended.

BK0121200US.book 28

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-29

7

Wiper blades N00940700011

Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean them regularly to remove deposits of salt and road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the blades and glass areas. Replace the blades if they continue to streak or smear.

NOTE Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long time. This

wears out the rubber and can scratch the glass.

During cold weather If the blades are frozen to the windshield or rear window, do not operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.

Emission-control system maintenance N00940800272

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-control system that meets all the requirements of the U.S. Environmental Protec- tion Agency and Environment Canada. The emission-control system is made of:

a positive crankcase ventilation system an evaporative emission-control system an exhaust emission-control system

The maintenance services listed in the WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL must be performed at the times or mileages listed to keep the emission-control system working properly. These, and all the other general maintenance ser- vices listed in this manual, need to be performed to keep your vehicle running properly and reliably.

You may need more frequent maintenance if you drive your vehicle in harsh conditions such as dusty areas or do a lot of start-and-stop driving.

To be sure the emission-control system works properly, have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice fol- lowing the schedule in the WARRANTY AND MAINTE- NANCE MANUAL. You should also have an inspection and service any time you suspect a malfunction.

BK0121200US.book 29

7-30

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

NOTE To meet government regulations and promote cleaner air,

your vehicle is equipped with an onboard diagnostic sys- tem (OBD). The engine electronic control module that controls OBD functions stores various data (especially about the exhaust emissions). This data will be erased if the battery cable is disconnected, which could make a rapid diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the battery cable when the malfunction indicator light (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or Check engine light) is on.

Spark plugs N00940900127

Spark plugs must fire properly for good engine performance and emission-control. Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. Change them at the mileage listed in the WARRANTY AND MAINTE- NANCE MANUAL. Your vehicle may be equipped with iridium tipped spark plugs, which are identified by marks on the ceramic. They do not require replacement as frequently as the conventional type spare plug and will last much longer.

NOTE Use the spark plugs listed under Engine specifications

on page 9-6 or plugs that are exactly the same. Other plugs could cause engine damage, performance problems or radio noise.

Fuel hoses N00941000011

Check the hose surfaces for any heat and mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay

special attention to the hoses closest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check all the hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure and that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or damage, replace the hoses immediately.

Fuel system (tank, pipe line and connection, and fuel tank filler tube cap)

N00941300144

Check these regularly for damage or leaks in the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel tank filler tube cap for damage or looseness. Pay special attention to the fuel lines closest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold.

Evaporative emission control system (except evaporative emission canister)

N00941400158

If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or damaged, the fuel- vapor mixture will escape, polluting the air. Have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage specified in the WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.

WARNING! If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel, do not run

the engine. Any spark (including from the ignition), flame or smoking material could cause an explosion or fire. Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.

BK0121200US.book 30

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-31

7

Direct ozone reduction radiator (if so equipped) N00952900023

Some models are equipped with a PremAir direct ozone reduction (DOR) radiator.

General maintenance N00941500159

The next pages list the maintenance service recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corporation. In addition to the general maintenance that needs to be performed at the times listed, there are other parts which do not usually need regular mainte- nance. But, if any of these parts stops working properly, your vehicle performance could suffer. Have these items checked if you notice a problem with them.

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance, if you have any questions.

Disc brake pads N00941600020

Good brakes are essential to safe driving. Check the brake pads for wear. For good braking performance, replace the brake pads with the same type pads as the originals.

Brake hoses N00941700047

Brake hoses and tubing should be checked for: Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn spots. If the

fabric casing of the hose is showing through any cracks or worn spots in the rubber hose cover, the hose should be replaced. The brakes can fail if the hose wears through.

Improper installation may cause twisting, or wheel, tire or chassis interference.

CAUTION! Replacement of this emission control component

with a non-DOR radiator is a violation of air pollu- tion regulation.

BK0121200US.book 31

7-32

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive shaft boots

N00941800080

Check the following parts for damage and grease leaks: Ball joint boots of the front suspension and steering link-

age Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft

Drive belt (for generator, power steering pump, air conditioning compressor)

N00941900283

Check the tension of the drive belt. Make certain that the indi- cator (A) is between the specified lines as shown in the illustra- tion. Check the drive belt for cuts and cracks, and replace it if it is damaged. When replacing the belt, make sure that there is no interference between the belt and other engine components. After replacing, recheck the tension to make sure the indicator (A) is between the specified lines.

WARNING! Do not check or touch the drive belt with the engine

running, or serious injury or death may result.

BK0121200US.book 32

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-33

7

Exhaust system N00942200010

The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas from entering inside your vehicle is to have the engine exhaust system prop- erly serviced. Have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust sys- tem and nearby body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts if you notice any of the following:

A change in the sound of the exhaust system The smell of exhaust fumes inside the vehicle The underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged

Also check the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes, or required service. Any open seams or loose connections could let dangerous exhaust fumes seep into the luggage compartment and passenger compart- ments.

Check for any of the following conditions: Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks caused by corrosion

or damage. Check the joints and connections for looseness or exhaust

gas leaks. Check the rubber hangers and brackets for damage.

Timing belt N00942300040

The timing belt should be replaced with a new one at the mile- age listed in the WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.

Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch N00942500042

The hood lock release mechanism and hood safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and oiled when needed for easy move- ment and to stop rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding parts of the hood latch and release lever. Work the grease into the hood lock mecha- nism until all the movable surfaces are covered. Also, put a light coat of the same grease on the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.

WARNING! Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicles exhaust is

poisonous. Breathing these fumes can cause uncon- sciousness or death.

BK0121200US.book 33

7-34

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

For cold and snowy weather N00942600115

Ventilation slots The ventilation slots in front of the windshield should be kept clear of leaves or brushed clear after a heavy snowfall, so that the operation of the heating and ventilation systems will not be impaired.

Weatherstripping To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should be treated with silicone grease.

Additional equipment (For regions where snow is encountered) It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-handled spade in the vehicle during the winter so that you can clear away snow if you get stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for the windshield, side and rear window are also useful.

Fuse links N00942700099

The fuse links will melt to prevent a fire if a large current attempts to flow through certain electrical systems. In case of a melted fuse link, see your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for inspection and replacement.

BK0121200US.book 34

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-35

7

Fuses N00942800263

Fuse block location N00901000080

To prevent damage to the electrical system from short-circuit- ing or overloading, each individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The fuse blocks are located in the passenger compartment and in the engine compartment.

Passenger compartment

The fuse block in the passenger compartment is located in front of the drivers seat at the position shown in the illustration.

Engine compartment In the engine compartment, the fuse blocks are located as shown in the illustration.

BK0121200US.book 35

7-36

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Type A 1. Push the lock lever. 2. Remove the fuse block cover.

WARNING! Do not touch the electronic control module (D). The

module surface can be too hot. Wait for the electronic control module to cool down before replacing a fuse.

BK0121200US.book 36

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-37

7

Type B 1. Push the lock lever. 2. Remove the relay box cover.

Type C 1. Pull the lock lever. 2. Open the cover.

Fuse load capacities N00954800101

This fuse list shows the names of the electrical systems and their fuse capacities. There are spare fuses in the cover of the instrument panel (drivers side). Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same capacity as the original.

BK0121200US.book 37

7-38

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Passenger compartment fuse location table

Passenger compartment fuse location

No. Symbol Electrical system Capacity

1 2

3 Radio 30 A

4 Sunroof 20 A

5 Rear window defogger 30 A

6 Heater 30 A

7 8

9 Power outlet 15 A

10 Power door locks 15 A

11 12

13 Engine control 7.5 A

14 Outside rearview mirrors 7.5 A

15

16 Cigarette lighter 15 A

17 Engine control 7.5 A

18

19 Door mirror heater 7.5 A

20 Relay 7.5 A

21

BK0121200US.book 38

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-39

7

Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depend- ing on the vehicle model or specifications.

The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse. The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A, 10 A and 15 A fuses. If a fuse of one of these capacities blows, replace it temporarily by borrowing the one that matches from: 7.5 A: Door mirror heater 10 A: Radio 15 A: Cigarette lighter Replace the borrowed fuse as soon as possible.

Engine compartment fuse location table

Type A 22 Back-up lights 7.5 A

23 Gauge 7.5 A

24 Ignition coil 10 A

25 Spare fuse 20 A 26 Spare fuse 30 A 27 Spare fuse 30 A

No. Symbol Electrical system Capacity

No. Symbol Electrical system Capacity

1 Battery 80 A*

2 Radiator fan motor 30 A*

3 Anti-lock braking system 60 A*

Engine compartment fuse location

Front

BK0121200US.book 39

7-40

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

*: Fusible link Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depend-

ing on the vehicle model or specifications. The table above shows the main equipment corresponding

to each fuse.

4 Ignition switch 40 A*

5 Power window control 30 A*

6 Front fog lights/ Daytime running lights 15 A

7 Heated seat 20 A

8 Horn 15 A

9 Engine control 20 A

10 Air conditioning 10 A

11 Stop lights 15 A

12 Rear fog light 10 A

13 Alternator 7.5 A

14 Hazard warning flasher 10 A

15 Automatic transaxle 20 A

16 Headlight high beam (right) 10 A

17 Headlight high beam (left) 10 A

18 Headlight low beam (right) 10 A

19 Headlight low beam (left) 10 A

20 Tail light (right) 7.5 A

21 Tail light (left) 7.5 A

22 Dome light 10 A

No. Symbol Electrical system Capacity

23 Radio 10 A

24 Fuel pump 15 A

25 Windshield wiper 30 A

No. Symbol Electrical system Capacity

BK0121200US.book 40

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-41

7

Type B

*: Fusible link Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depend-

ing on the vehicle model or specifications. The table above shows the main equipment corresponding

to each fuse.

Type C

*: Fusible link Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depend-

ing on the vehicle model or specifications. The table above shows the main equipment corresponding

to each fuse.

No. Symbol Electrical system Capacity

1 Condenser fan motor 20 A*

Engine compartment fuse location

Front

No. Symbol Electrical system Capacity

1 Radio 40 A*

Engine compartment fuse location

Front

BK0121200US.book 41

7-42

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Identification of fuse N00901100065

Fuse replacement N00954900043

1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the electrical item connected to the fuse and turn the ignition key to the LOCK position.

2. There is a fuse puller in the cover of the instrument panel (drivers side).

3. Remove the fuse puller from the cover.

Capacity Color 7.5 A Brown 10 A Red 15 A Blue 20 A Yellow (fuse type) / Light blue (fusible link type) 30 A Green (fuse type) / Pink (fusible link type) 40 A Green 60 A Yellow 80 A White

BK0121200US.book 42

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-43

7

4. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse block.

5. Use the fuse location diagrams and the matching tables, to check the fuse that is related to the problem. If the fuse is not blown, something else must be causing the problem. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to have the problem checked.

A- Fuse is OK B- Blown fuse

BK0121200US.book 43

7-44

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

6. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity securely into the appropriate slot.

Replacement of light bulbs N00942900293

Before replacing a bulb, be sure the light is off. Do not touch the glass part of the new bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy the bulb when it gets hot.

NOTE If you are unsure of how to perform the work as required,

it is recommended that these procedures be performed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body when removing a light and lens.

When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same phenomenon as when window glass mists up on a humid day, and does not indicate a functional problem. When the light is switched on, the heat will remove the fog. However, if water gathers inside the light, please have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

CAUTION! Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than the one

listed or any substitute, such as wire, foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring to heat up and could cause a fire.

If the replacement fuse blows again after a short time, have the electrical system checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to find and correct the cause.

CAUTION! Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after being

turned off. When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool sufficiently before touching it. You could otherwise be burned.

BK0121200US.book 44

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-45

7

Bulb capacity N00943000044

The bulb should only be replaced with a new bulb with the same rating and type. The type and rating are listed on the base of the bulb.

Outside N00950300746

Description Wattage or Candle power

ANSI Trade No. or Bulb type

1 - Headlight 9007 HB5

2 - Front side-marker light 5 W WY5W 3 - Front fog light

(if so equipped) 45 W H10

4 - Front turn-signal and parking light 32/3 cp 1157NA

Front

BK0121200US.book 45

7-46

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

NOTE The high-mounted stop light uses LEDs rather than bulbs.

For repair and replacement, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Inside N00950400532

Description Wattage or Candle power

ANSI Trade No. or Bulb type

5 - High-mounted stop light (LED type)

6 - License plate light 5 W 3 cp

W5W 168

7 - Back-up light 21 W 7440 8 - Rear turn-signal light 21 W WY21W 9 - Tail and stop light /

Rear side-marker light 21/5 W 7443

Rear

Description Wattage 1 - Trunk room light 5 W 2 - Dome light 10 W 3 - Reading light 5 W 4 - Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) 1.4 W 5 - Glove compartment light (if so equipped) 1.4 W

BK0121200US.book 46

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-47

7

Headlights N00943100856

1. When replacing the headlight bulb on the left side, remove the relay box. Pull the relay box (B) upward while pressing the tab (A).

2. Depress the tab (C) on the harness connector and pull the harness connector toward you to remove it.

BK0121200US.book 47

7-48

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

3. Remove the locking cap (D) by turning it counterclock- wise.

4. Remove the headlight bulb (E) with holder.

5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

BK0121200US.book 48

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-49

7

Adjustment of headlight aim N00943200121

The alignment of the headlights should be checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

CAUTION! Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas inside

a halogen light bulb is highly pressurized, so drop- ping, knocking, or scratching a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.

Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlights are used. If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with alcohol and let it dry completely before installing the bulb.

BK0121200US.book 49

7-50

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Front turn-signal and parking lights N00917300424

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it. And remove the bulb from the socket by turning it counter- clockwise while pressing in.

2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

Front side-marker lights N00943400282

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it. And remove the bulb from the socket by pulling out.

2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

BK0121200US.book 50

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-51

7

Front fog lights (if so equipped) N00943600691

1. Remove the clips (A) and screws (B), then remove the cover (C).

2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly (D) by turning it counterclockwise.

BK0121200US.book 51

7-52

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

3. Pull part (E) in the direction of the arrow (F) to undo the lock, thereby freeing the fog light bulb from the connec- tor.

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

CAUTION! Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas inside

a halogen light bulb is highly pressurized, so drop- ping, knocking, or scratching a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.

Never hold the halogen lights bulb with a bare hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the fog lights are used. If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with alcohol and let it dry completely before installing the bulb.

BK0121200US.book 52

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-53

7

Rear combination lights N00943700416

1. Open the lid. Partially take off the trim cover (A).

2. Remove each socket and bulb assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

B- Rear turn-signal light Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

C- Tail and stop light Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

BK0121200US.book 53

7-54

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Back-up lights N00901200053

1. Open the trunk lid. On vehicles equipped with the trunk lid grip, remove the screws (A), and remove the trunk lid grip (B).

2. On vehicles equipped with the cover, remove the clips (C) by prying with a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver, and remove the cover (D).

BK0121200US.book 54

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-55

7

3. Remove the socket and bulb assembly by turning it coun- terclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

E- Back-up light

BK0121200US.book 55

7-56

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

NOTE To reinstall the clips, first insert the prongs (F) into the

hole, then firmly press the cap portion (G).

High-mounted stop light N00943900098

NOTE The high-mounted stop light uses an LED instead of a

bulb. Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice when the light needs to be repaired or replaced.

BK0121200US.book 56

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-57

7

License plate light N00944000373

1. Open the trunk lid. On vehicles equipped with the trunk lid grip, remove the screws (A), and remove the trunk lid grip (B).

2. On vehicles equipped with the cover, remove the clips (C) by prying with a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver, and remove the cover (D).

BK0121200US.book 57

7-58

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

3. Open the trunk lid. Remove the socket and bulb assembly by turning it coun- terclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

BK0121200US.book 58

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-59

7

Dome light N00944100231

1. Insert the tip of a screwdriver at the edge of the lens, pry gently to remove the lens, and then remove the bulb from the light holder.

NOTE Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screwdriver to keep

from scratching the lens.

2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

Reading lights N00944400104

Have the reading light bulbs replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Glove compartment light (if so equipped) N00954200020

Have the glove compartment light bulbs replaced at an autho- rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Front

BK0121200US.book 59

7-60

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Trunk room light N00944800081

1. Pull both clips (A) away from the center as shown and remove the light unit. Then remove the bulb by pulling out.

2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

Vanity mirror lights (if so equipped) N00952800064

1. Insert the tip of a screwdriver at the edge of the lens, pry gently to remove the lens, and then remove the bulb from the light holder.

NOTE Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screwdriver to keep

from scratching the lens.

2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

BK0121200US.book 60

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-61

7

Vehicle care precautions N00945100023

In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, perform regular maintenance using the proper materials and procedures. Be sure to use only those materials and procedures that meet your local environmental pollution control regulations. Choose the materials you will use carefully, to be sure that they do not con- tain corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help in choosing these materials.

These can all be dangerous, and they all can damage your vehi- cle.

CAUTION! Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some are poi-

sonous. Others are highly flammable. Some are dan- gerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything in a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the instructions. Always open your vehicle doors or windows when youre cleaning the inside. Never use the following chemi- cals to clean your vehicle: Gasoline Carbon Tetrachloride Benzine Kerosene Naphtha Acetone Turpentine Paint Thinner Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover

BK0121200US.book 61

7-62

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Cleaning the inside of your vehicle N00945200037

After washing the inside of your vehicle with any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well ventilated area.

NOTE Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and flocked parts N00945300041

1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap and water.

2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring out well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent thoroughly.

NOTE Do not use cleaners, conditioners, or protectants contain-

ing silicone or wax. Such products may cause annoying reflections and obscure vision.

Upholstery N00945500030

1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle, maintain the upholstery carefully and keep the interior clean. Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic leather should be cleaned with an appropriate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a 3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm water.

2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner and remove any stains with carpet cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth and spot remover.

NOTE If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat upholstery,

draw a suitable defuzzing brush over the surface in one direction.

Genuine leather (if so equipped) N00945600262

1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a soft cloth soaked in a 5 % solution of gentle soap and water.

2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, wring it out well, and wipe off all the soap.

3. To preserve and protect, use a leather protecting agent on the genuine leather surface.

NOTE If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it with a dry,

soft cloth. If left damp, mildew may grow and damage the leather surface.

CAUTION! Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene,

alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or cracking of the surface. If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances men- tioned above.

BK0121200US.book 62

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-63

7

The genuine leather surface can be damaged if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber brush.

Organic solvents such as benzine, alcohol, gasoline, acid or alkaline solvents can discolor the genuine leather sur- face and should not be used.

Genuine leather can mildew if not kept clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.

The genuine leather surface may harden and shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, place it in the shade as much as possi- ble.

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle N00945700045

To protect your vehicles finish, wash it often and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your vehicle using a nonabrasive auto- mobile wax.

Foreign material N00945800017

Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other foreign matters can damage the finish on your vehicle. Generally, the longer any foreign material stays on the finish, the worse the damage. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible whenever the finish gets soiled.

Washing N00945900454

Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked up from air, rain, snow or road surfaces can damage the paint and body of your vehicle if left on. Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to protect your vehicle from this damage. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge, wash the vehicle from top to bottom. Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a chamois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints and flanges of the doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to remain.

BK0121200US.book 63

7-64

Vehicle care and maintenance

7 During cold weather Salt and other chemicals spread on winter roads in some geo- graphical areas can have a detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody. You should flush the underbody with a high pres- sure hose every time you wash the outside of your vehicle.

Take special care to remove mud or other debris which could trap and hold salt and moisture. After washing your vehicle, wipe off all waterdrops from the rubber parts around the doors to prevent the doors from freez- ing.

NOTE When the door is frozen, opening it by force may tear off

or crack the rubber gasket installed around the door. Pour warm water to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe off the water after opening the door. To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubricant.

Waxing N00946000074

Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or when water does not bead up on the paint. Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax on the painted surfaces. After the wax has dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. You should wax when the painted surfaces are cool.

CAUTION! When washing the underside of your vehicle or the

wheels, wear a pair of gloves to protect your hands. Never spray or splash water on the electrical parts

in the engine compartment. This may damage them. Be careful also when washing the underbody. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.

Avoid automatic car washers that use rotating brushes. These brushes may scratch the paint sur- face and make it dull. Scratches are more noticeable on darker colored vehicles.

Some hot water washing equipment uses high pres- sure and heat to clean your vehicle. This heated water may damage your vehicles resin parts. It can flood the interior of the vehicle. Therefore, be sure of the following: Keep the washing nozzle at least 20 inches (50 cm)

away from the vehicle body. When washing around the door glass, hold the

nozzle at a distance of more than 20 inches (50 cm) and at right angles to the glass surface.

Make sure to fold the outside mirrors when using an automatic car wash to avoid damaging your vehicle.

CAUTION! Waxes containing high abrasive compounds should

not be used. These waxes remove rust and stain effectively from the paintwork, but are harmful to the finish of the paint, because they also remove paint/clearcoat. They are also harmful to other glossy surfaces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.

BK0121200US.book 64

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-65

7

Polishing N00946100017

If painted surfaces have been severely damaged and lost their original luster and color tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine polishing compound. Avoid limiting your polishing to the damaged surface only; polish a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush the compound from the surface and apply a coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.

Damaged paint N00946200018

Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat should be touched up as soon as possible with touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. Check body areas facing the road or the tires carefully for dam- age to the paint caused by flying stones, etc. The paint code

number for your vehicle can be found on the vehicle informa- tion code plate in the engine compartment.

Do not use gasoline, kerosene, benzene or paint thin- ners to remove road tar or other dirt from the vehi- cle surface.

Do not put wax on the areas having black matte coating because it can cause uneven discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get wax on them, wipe the wax off right away with a soft cloth and warm water.

On vehicles with sunroof, be careful not to apply any wax on the weatherstrip (black rubber) when wax- ing the area around the sunroof opening. If stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot main- tain a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.

CAUTION!

BK0121200US.book 65

7-66

Vehicle care and maintenance

7

Cleaning plastic parts N00946300208

Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts. If vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black rough surface of the bumper, moulding or lights, the surface may appear white in color. In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water and a soft cloth or chamois.

Chrome parts N00946400010

To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a com- mercially available chrome polish.

Aluminum wheels (if so equipped) N00946500167

1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprinkling water on the wheel.

2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that cannot be removed easily with water. Rinse off the neutral detergent after washing the wheel.

3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois leather or a soft cloth.

Window glass N00946600012

The window glass can usually be cleaned using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.

CAUTION! Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough scrub-

ber as these may damage the plastic surface. Do not use wax containing compounds (polishing

powder) which may damage the plastic surface. Do not let the plastic parts get soiled with gasoline,

light oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases, paint thin- ner and sulfuric acid (battery electrolyte). These flu- ids, etc., may crack, stain or discolor the plastic parts. If any of these get on the plastic parts, wipe them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a watery solution of gentle soap. Then rinse them immediately with water.

CAUTION! Do not use a brush or other hard implement on the

wheels. Doing so could scratch the wheels.

Do not use any cleaner that contains an abrasive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing so could cause the coating on the wheels to peel or become discolored or stained.

Do not directly apply hot water using a steam cleaner or by any other means.

Contact with seawater and road deicer can cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances as soon as pos- sible.

BK0121200US.book 66

Vehicle care and maintenance

7-67

7

Wiper blades N00946700013

Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper blades. Replace the wiper blades when they no longer clean the windshield and rear window properly.

Cleaning the sunroof (if so equipped) N00946800014

Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped away with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral detergent solution. Wipe away the solution with a sponge dipped in fresh water.

NOTE The surface treatment on the inside of the glass may be

removed if a hard cloth or organic solvent is used.

Engine compartment N00947000042

Never spray or splash water on the electrical components in the engine compartment, as this may cause damage. Do not allow any nearby parts (such as plastic parts) come into contact with sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte), which may crack, stain, or discolour them. If this occurs, wipe the parts with a soft cloth saturated with a mild detergent and water solution. Then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water.

BK0121200US.book 67

BK0121200US.book 68

8

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 2

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8- 3 Important facts to know in case of an accident . . .8- 4

BK0121200US.book 1

8-2

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

8

Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

N01047100100

This information is provided in compliance with the require- ments of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers with information on reporting safety defects.

Uniform tire quality grading DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. The specific grade rating in each grade category is shown on the side wall of the tires on your vehicle.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative perfor- mance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pave- ment as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, represent- ing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tempera- ture can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire fail- ure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for

a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive load- ing, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

BK0121200US.book 2

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

8-3

8

Reporting Safety Defects N01047200387

For vehicles sold in U.S.A. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam- paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hot- line toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

You can also obtain other information about motor vehi- cle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

To contact Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. call 1- 888-648-7820 or write to:

For vehicles sold in Canada If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Trans- port Canada, in addition to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. You may write to:

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. call 1- 888-57- MITSU (1-888-576-4878) or write to:NHTSA Headquarters

1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE West Building Washington, DC 20590.

Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 6400 Cypress, CA 90630-0064

Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 41009 4141 Dixie Road Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9

BK0121200US.book 3

8-4

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

8

Important facts to know in case of an acci- dent

N01047300098

We hope you will never be involved in an accident, but there is always that potential danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and drive safely.

In the event of an accident Remain calm. Check for injuries. Report all injuries to the police, and, if

necessary, call for an ambulance. Record all the details of the accident. This will provide

you with accurate records of the accident for discussions with your insurance company and other persons who may be acting on your behalf.

Key information to discuss with your insurance company

Understand your repair estimate before approving repairs. Choosing the repair shop and the brands of parts that they

use on your vehicle is your decision. Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts. Many times, to

save money, your insurance company will recommend imitation parts that do not meet the original specifications of fit, finish, corrosion resistance or workmanship.

Mitsubishi Motors built-in protection The strength and integrity built into your Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific design referred to as Energy Manage- ment. Individual body parts are designed to act as one unit in the event of an accident. Shock waves are absorbed by protec- tive panels or are channeled around the passenger compart-

ment. This important feature is possible because high tensile steel is used in Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, some- thing that cannot be guaranteed by the manufacturers of imita- tion parts. All Genuine Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets are designed and constructed as important protection features in the event of an accident. By replacing body parts with imitations, your vehicle may no longer meet original equipment specifications.

Consumer rights (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) As a consumer requesting repair on your vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the country, State Insurance Commis- sioners have begun considering rules on the use of non-OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops will have to disclose to the consumer, when they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since regulations are not consistent on this point, remember you have a choice. So, if you want genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may have to specifically request them. Make certain your insurance company understands imitations are not to be used in the repair of your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built with the high quality and durability standards you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors replacements parts are your guarantee that your vehicle will have all the technological advantages and maintain the style and protection of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors. Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.

BK0121200US.book 4

9

Specifications

Vehicle labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 2 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 4 Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 5 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 6 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 7 Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 7 Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9- 8

BK0121200US.book 1

9-2

Specifications

9

Vehicle labeling N01147400638

Keep a record of the vehicle identification number. This infor- mation will assist the police if your vehicle is stolen.

1 - Vehicle emission control information label The vehicle emission control information label is affixed on the underside of the engine hood.

2 - Vehicle identification number plate The vehicle identification number is stamped on the plate riv- eted to the left front corner of the dashboard. It is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield.

3 - Air conditioning label The air conditioning label is affixed on the underside of the engine hood.

Engine serial number The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder block as shown in the illustration.

*- Front of the vehicle

BK0121200US.book 2

Specifications

9-3

9

Tire and loading information placard N01148100384

The tire and loading information placard is located on the drivers door sill.

Type 1

Type 2

A- Vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada (Type 1) B- Vehicles sold in Canada (Type 2)

BK0121200US.book 3

9-4

Specifications

9

Certification label N01148200141

The certification label is located on the drivers door sill.

Vehicle dimensions N01147500495

Overall length 191.1 in (4,853 mm) Overall width 72.4 in (1,840 mm)

Overall height

Vehicles with 16 inch tires 57.4 in (1,458 mm)

Vehicles with 18 inch tires 57.7 in (1,465 mm)

Wheel base 108.3 in (2,750 mm)

BK0121200US.book 4

Specifications

9-5

9

Vehicle weights N01147600773

GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle Seating capacity: the number of maximum occupants

Gross vehicle weight rating 4,376 lb (1,985 kg)

Gross axle weight rating Front 2,337 lb (1,060 kg) Rear 2,072 lb (940 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg) Seating capacity 5 persons

BK0121200US.book 5

9-6

Specifications

9

Engine specifications N01147700484

Engine model 4G69 Engine displacement 145.1 CID (2,378 cm) No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement 4 in-line Bore 3.43 in (87.0 mm) Stroke 3.9 in (100.0 mm) Compression ratio 9.5 Thermostat valve opening temperature 188.6 F (87.0 C) Spark plugs NGK LZFR6AI Spark plug gap .028 to .031 in (0.7 to 0.8 mm) Firing order 1-3-4-2

BK0121200US.book 6

Specifications

9-7

9

Battery N01147800238

Battery is a 12 volt type.

NOTE There are various size of batteries in BCI Groups No.86.

When you replace the battery, confirm the size of the replacement battery will not interfere with other compo- nents in the engine compartment.

Tires and wheels N01147900620

PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation holes)

NOTE Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details

on the combination used on your vehicle. These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions described in

this owners manual.

BCI Group No.86 Tire P215/60R16 94T P235/45R18 94V

Wheel Size 16 x 6 1/2JJ 18 x 8J PCD 4.5 in (114.3 mm) Offset 1.81 in (46 mm)

BK0121200US.book 7

9-8

Specifications

9

Capacities N01148000859

Item Capacity Lubricants Fuel (approximate) 17.7 gal (67.0 L) Refer to Fuel selection on page 1-2.

Engine oil

Oil pan 4.2 qt (4.0 L) Engine oils displaying ILSAC certification mark (starburst symbol) on the container. If these oils are not available, an API classification SM can be used.

Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)

Power steering As required Genuine Mitsubishi Power Steering Fluid Automatic transaxle 8.1 qt (7.7 L) DIAMOND ATF SP III Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4 Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2 Engine coolant {Includes .63 qt (0.6 L) in reserve tank} 8.5 qt (8.0 L) Long Life Antifreeze Coolant or an equivalent

Windshield washer fluid 4.2 qt (4.0 L)

Refrigerant (air conditioning) Refer to the air

conditioning label on page 9-2.

HFC-134a

BK0121200US.book 8

Alphabetical index

1

A Accessory boxes 3-131 Accessory (installation) 1-7 Active stability control 3-51

ASC indicator 3-54 ASC OFF indicator 3-54 ASC OFF switch 3-53 Skid control function 3-53 Traction control function 3-52

Air cleaner filter 7-11 Air conditioning 5-5, 5-13

Important operating tips for the air conditioning 5-21 Air conditioning label 9-2 Aluminum wheels 7-66 Antenna

Glass antenna 5-71 Satellite radio antenna 5-71

Anti-lock braking system 3-49 Warning light 3-50

Arm rest 2-11 ASC 3-51 ASC indicator 3-54 ASC OFF indicator 3-54 ASC OFF switch 3-53 Audio system 5-22

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger- Type 2 5-37

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player-Type 1 5- 24 AM/FM/Satellite electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 3 5-37 Handling of compact discs 5-68 Steering wheel remote control switch 5-62

Automatic transaxle 3-39 Fluid 7-12, 9-8 Selector lever operation 3-39 Selector lever positions 3-43 Sports mode 3-44

B Back-up lights

Capacity 7-45 Replacement 7-54

Ball joint, steering linkage seals, drive shaft boots 7-32 Battery 7-15

Charging system warning light 3-80 Checking battery electrolyte level 7-16 Disconnection and connection 7-17 During cold weather 7-17 Specification 9-7

Brake Anti-lock braking system 3-49 Braking 4-6 Fluid 7-14, 9-8 Hose 7-31 Parking brake 3-28

BK0121200US.book 1

Alphabetical index

2

Parking brake lever stroke 7-28 Pedal 3-47 Pedal free play 7-28 Power brakes 3-48 Service brake 3-47 Warning light 3-78

Break-in recommendations 3-2 Bulb capacity 7-45

C California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 1-9 Capacities 9-8 Cargo loads 4-12 Catalytic converter 7-3 Certification label 9-4 Charging system warning light 3-80 Child restraints 2-28 Child safety locks for rear door 3-15 Cleaning

Inside of your vehicle 7-62 Outside of your vehicle 7-63

Clock 3-123 Coat hooks 3-134 Combination headlights and dimmer switch 3-81 Consumer information 8-2 Coolant (engine) 7-9, 9-8 Cruise control 3-57

Indicator light 3-58 Cup holder 3-133

D Defogger (rear window) 3-90 Digital clock 3-123 Dimensions 9-4 Dimmer (high/low beam change) 3-83 Disc brake pads 7-31 Dome light 3-129

Capacity 7-46 Replacement 7-59

Door-ajar warning buzzer 3-80 Door-ajar warning light 3-80 Doors

Lock 3-12 Power door locks 3-14

Drive belt 7-32 Driving during cold weather 4-5 Driving, alcohol and drugs 4-2

E Electric rear window defogger switch 3-90 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) 3-3 Emission-control system maintenance 7-29 Engine

Compartment 7-6 Coolant 7-9, 9-8 Coolant temperature gauge 3-76 Hood 7-4 Malfunction indicator light 3-79

BK0121200US.book 2

Alphabetical index

3

Oil and oil filter 7-6, 9-8 Overheating 6-5 Serial number 9-2 Specifications 9-6

Error codes 5-64, 5-66 Exhaust system 7-33

F Filling the fuel tank 1-4 Floor console box 3-132 Fluid

Automatic transaxle fluid 7-12, 9-8 Brake fluid 7-14, 9-8 Engine coolant 7-9, 9-8 Power steering fluid 7-15, 9-8 Washer fluid 7-13, 9-8

Fluid capacities and lubricants 9-8 Fog lights

Indicator 3-78 Switch 3-86

For cold and snowy weather 7-34 Front fog light

Capacity 7-45 Front fog lights

Replacement 7-51 Front seats 2-4 Front side-marker lights

Capacity 7-45 Front turn-signal lights

Capacity 7-45 Fuel

Fuel economy 4-2 Fuel gauge 3-75 Fuel hoses 7-30 Low-fuel warning light 3-75 Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems 1-8 Tank capacity 9-8

Fuel selection 1-2 Fuse links 7-34 Fuses 7-35

Block location 7-35 Identification 7-42 Load capacities 7-37 Replacement 7-42

G Gauges 3-72 General maintenance 7-31 General vehicle data 9-4 Genuine parts 1-8 Glove compartment 3-131 Glove compartment light

Replacement 7-59

H Hands-free Bluetooth cellular phone interface system with

voice recognition 3-92 Hazard warning flasher switch 3-85

BK0121200US.book 3

Alphabetical index

4

Hazard warning lights 3-78 Head restraints 2-12 Headlights

Capacity 7-45 Dimmer 3-83 Headlight flasher 3-84 Switch 3-81

High beam indicator 3-78 High-mounted stop light

Capacity 7-45 HomeLink Wireless Control System 3-124 Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch 7-33 Horn switch 3-91

I If the vehicle breaks down 6-2 Ignition switch 3-34 Important facts to know in case of an accident 8-4 Indicator 3-78 Indicator and warning light package 3-77 Inside emergency trunk lid release 3-18 Inside rearview mirror 3-30 Instrument cluster 3-72 Instrument panel light dimmer control 3-87 Interior lights 3-128

Auto-cutout function 3-130 Dome light 3-129 Reading lights 3-128

J Jack 6-8

Storage 6-7 Jump-starting the engine 6-2

K Key reminder buzzer 3-14, 3-35 Keyless entry system 3-7 Keys 3-2

L Labeling 9-2 License plate light

Capacity 7-45 Replacement 7-57

Loading information 4-8 Low-fuel warning light 3-75 Lubricants 9-8 Luggage hooks 3-134

M Mirror

Inside rearview mirror 3-30 Outside rearview mirrors 3-32

Modification of your vehicle 1-6

O Octane rating 1-2

BK0121200US.book 4

Alphabetical index

5

Odometer 3-73 Oil

Engine oil 7-6 Oil pressure warning light 3-80 Operation under adverse driving conditions 6-23 Outside rearview mirrors 3-32 Overhead console control switch 3-93 Overheating 6-5

P Parking 4-7

Parking brake 3-28 Parking brake lever stroke 7-28

Pen holders 3-132 Polishing 7-65 Power brakes 3-48 Power door locks 3-14 Power outlet 3-122 Power steering

Fluid 7-15, 9-8 System 3-56

Power windows 3-23 Puncture (Tire changing) 6-9

R Radiator cap 7-10 Radio

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger- Type 2 5-37

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player-Type 1 5- 24 AM/FM/Satellite electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 3 5-37 General information about your radio 5-72

Reading light Capacity 7-46

Reading lights 3-128 Replacement 7-59

Rear side-marker light Capacity 7-45

Rear turn-signal lights Capacity 7-45 Replacement 7-53

Rear window defogger switch 3-90 Rear-view camera 3-69 Rearview mirror

Inside 3-30 Outside 3-32

Refrigerant (air conditioning) 9-8 Replacement of light bulbs 7-44 Replacing tires and wheels 7-24 Reporting Safety Defects 8-3

S Safe driving techniques 4-5 Seat 2-2

Arm rest 2-11 Front seats 2-4

BK0121200US.book 5

Alphabetical index

6

Heated seats 2-10 Rear seat 2-11 Seats and restraint systems 2-3

Seat belt 2-15 Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor 2-22 Child restraints 2-28 Maintenance and inspection 2-38 Pre-tensioner 2-26 Seat belt extender 2-25 Seat belt guide 2-23 Seat belt reminder/warning light 2-20 Seat belt use during pregnancy 2-25

Service brake 3-47 Service precautions 7-2 Skid control function 3-53 Snow tires 7-27 Spark plugs 7-30 Speedometer 3-73 Steering

Power steering fluid 7-15, 9-8 Tilt lock lever 3-29 Wheel lock 3-36

Steering wheel remote control switch 5-62 Stop lights

Capacity 7-45 Replacement 7-53

Sun visors 3-121 Sunroof 3-26 Supplemental Restraint System 2-38

How the Supplement Restraint System works 2-42 Servicing 2-60 Warning light 2-47

T Tachometer 3-73 Tail lights

Capacity 7-45 Replacement 7-53

Tank capacity 9-8 Theft-alarm system 3-20 Timing belt 7-33 Tire pressure monitoring system 3-63 Tires 7-19

How to change a tire 6-9 Inflation pressure 7-23 Maintenance 7-24 Quality grading 8-2 Replacing tires and wheels 7-24 Rotation 7-25 Size (tire and wheel) 9-7 Snow tires 7-27 Tire and loading information placard 4-9, 9-3 Tire chains 7-27 Tread wear indicators 7-25

Tissue holder 3-132 Tools 6-8

Storage 6-7 Towing 6-21

BK0121200US.book 6

Alphabetical index

7

Traction control function 3-52 Trailer towing 4-13 Trip odometer 3-73 Trunk lid 3-16 Trunk room light

Capacity 7-46 Replacement 7-60

Turn signal light Indicators 3-78 Lever 3-84

V Vanity mirror 3-122 Vanity mirror light

Capacity 7-46 Vanity mirror lights

Replacement 7-60 Vehicle care precautions 7-61 Vehicle dimensions 9-4 Vehicle emission control information label 9-2 Vehicle identification number plate 9-2 Vehicle labeling 9-2 Vehicle preparation before driving 4-3 Vehicle weights 9-5 Vents 5-2

W Warning lights 3-78 Washer

Fluid 7-13 Switch 3-89

Washer fluid 9-8 Waxing 7-64 Weights 9-5 Wheel

Covers 6-19 Specification 9-7

Wiper Switch 3-87 Windshield 3-87 Wiper blades 7-29

BK0121200US.book 7

How to calculate your gasoline mileage

You can calculate your miles-per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre by using the following process:

1. Fill your vehicles fuel tank and record the odometer mile- age.

2. Drive your vehicle as you normally do.

3. Refill the fuel tank. Record the odometer mileage again, as well as the gallons/litres of fuel used.

4. Subtract the first mileage number from the second number to know how many miles/kilometers were driven. Divide the number of miles/kilometers driven by the number of gallons/litres of fuel used. This is your approximate miles- per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre.

Gas mileage record Gas mileage record

Date Odometer Gallons /Litres

This Fill

Cost Per Gallon /Litre

Cost This Fill

Miles Per Gallon/Kilo- meters Per Litre

(Miles/Gals.)/(Kilome- ters/Litres)

Date Odometer Gallons /Litres

This Fill

Cost Per Gallon /Litre

Cost This Fill

Miles Per Gallon/Kilo- meters Per Litre

(Miles/Gals.)/(Kilome- ters/Litres)

MMNA_ .fm 1

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Galant Mitsubishi MOTORS works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Motors Galant 2011 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Mitsubishi MOTORS Galant as well as other Mitsubishi MOTORS manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi MOTORS Galant. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Motors Galant 2011 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi Motors Galant 2011 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi Motors Galant 2011 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi Motors Galant 2011 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Motors Galant 2011 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.